ENERGY LABORATORY "................................................................"

"Technical Information"
ADVANCED
ENERGY LABORATORY
(5AD)
* Center:
"................................................................"
* Country: "................................................................"
* Date:
* Issue:
"................................................................"
"................................................................"
Quality Certificates:
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
Advanced Energy Laboratory
(5AD)
Index
- Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out (Example).
- List of modules and teaching units included plus summarised catalogues
(included in priority 1 + 2 + 3).
Ref.:5AD-pre(01/11)
Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out
ADVANCED
ENERGY LABORATORY
(Example of Priority 1)
(5AD)
32 cm
OTHER TEACHING
AND
NON TEACHING UNITS
OTHER PRIORITIES
Unit
LOCAL NET
WITH SCADA-NET
SYSTEM
EDIBON
ESN
SCADA-NET
TEACHER
DESK
STOCK
1,4 cm
90x60
90x60
EEEC
MPSSC
INT
INT
Unit
ROOM 3
1,6 cm
1,5 cm
Web-cam
Computer for each Teaching Unit
Teacher and Student Desk with
computers
Table for Teaching Unit
EESTC
OTHER TEACHING
AND
NON TEACHING UNITS
OTHER PRIORITIES
Unit
25 cm
Unit
Teaching Unit
INT
Electronic
Interface
90x40
Cupboard
150x80 cm
48x35 cm
EDIBON ESN SCADA-NET
90x60 cm
80x30
Table office
Shelves
Table
E: 1:100
9 cm
90x60
PROJECTOR
INT
COMPUTER
CONTROLLED
UNITS
150x80
150x80
150x80
90x40
90x40
90x40
ROOM 2
MAIN
ELECTRICAL
CABINET
90x60
EMERGENCY DOOR
ROOM 1
MAIN
WATER
CABINET
90x60
2,7 cm
90x40
150x80
06x051
MAIN
AIR
PANEL
90x60
90x40
TOILET
100x40
ELECTRONIC
BLACKBOARD
SERVICES
MANAGER
ROOM
90x60
TOILET
INT
Unit
90x40
150x80
Unit
LIELBA
SEMINARY
EESFC
EXPANSIONS SPACE
STUDENT
TOILET
STAND ALONG
AND
DANGEROUS
UNITS
INT
90x40
3,3 cm
Advanced Energy Laboratory
(5AD)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 1
0400. Electricity
0453-450/10S: Energy Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0453-451/10S: Energy Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0453-452/10S: Energy Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0453/5A: Energy Installations (5 MUAD)
0500. Energy
0510: Energy: Modular Power System Simulator Basic Module
0511: Energy: Modular Power Simulator (ESN)
0531/10S: Main Advanced Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0531/PLC: PLCs Modul
0500/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Energy Unit
Ref.:5AD-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
ENERGY INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0453-450/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIELBA .
"INDUSTRIAL " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
AE1
ALI01
CAR18
CAR08
APPLICATION - AERIAL LINE MODEL,INCLUDED
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AERIAL LINE MODEL.
3-PHASE VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD (CUSTOMMADE).
3-PHASE CAPACITIVE LOAD.
3-PHASE INDUCTIVE LOAD.
3-PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER 220 / 127 V, 1000
VA.
PETERSEN COIL.
1
1
1
1
CAR11
CAR14
TRA05
TRA18
1
1
1
1
2
AE1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - AERIAL LINE MODEL
10
3
AE1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - AERIAL LINE MODEL. (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
4
AE8
APPLICATION - POWER & TORQUE MEASUREMENTS
OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS,INCLUYE:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
3-POLES CONTACTOR (220 VAC).
2 DOUBLE PUSH-BUTTONS (230 VAC).
TIME ELECTRONIC RELAY AGAINST OVERCURRENTS
(0.3 - 1.5 A).
NETWORK ANALYZER.
MOTOR (EMT7) (SQUIRREL CAGE).
DYNAMO BRAKE 300W
TACHODYNAMO 60V,1000 R.P.M.
1
ALI01
ALI03
CON02
PUL11
REL08
MED60
VAR02
FREND.
TECNEL/T.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
AE8/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - POWER & TORQUE MEASUREMENTS
OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS
10
6
AE8/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - POWER & TORQUE MEASUREMENTS
OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS. (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
8
MUAD
1
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
10
0430PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
11
0430PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
9
Ref: 0453-450/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
12
0430IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
13
0430CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
14
0430TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
15
0430MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
ENERGY INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0453-451/10S
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
LIELBA .
"INDUSTRIAL " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
AE2
APPLICATION - REACTIVE ENERGY CONTROL AND
COMPENSATION,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
3-PHASE CAPACITIVE LOAD.
3-PHASE INDUCTIVE LOAD.
3-PHASE VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD (CUSTOMMADE).
ALI01
CAR11
CAR14
CAR08
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
AE2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - REACTIVE ENERGY CONTROL AND
COMPENSATION
10
3
AE2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - REACTIVE ENERGY CONTROL AND
COMPENSATION. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
4
AE3
APPLICATION - TEST UNIT FOR MAGNETO-THERMAL
AUTOMATIC SWITCHES,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
2-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 1
A, CURVE C.
VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD, 150 OHM, 500 W.
TRANSFORMER FOR EXPERIMENTS (CUSTOM MADE).
1
ALI01
IAM13
CAR04
TRA19
1
1
1
1
5
AE3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - TEST UNIT FOR MAGNETO-THERMAL
AUTOMATIC SWITCHES
10
6
AE3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - TEST UNIT FOR MAGNETO-THERMAL
AUTOMATIC SWITCHES. (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
AE4
APPLICATION - TEST UNIT FOR DIFFERENTIAL
AUTOMATIC SWITCHES,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
1-POLE + NEUTRAL DIFFERENTIAL AUTOMATIC
SWITCH, 6 A, 30 MA, CLASS A.
VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD, 150 OHM, 500 W.
1
ALI01
IAD01
CAR04
1
1
1
8
AE4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - TEST UNIT FOR DIFFERENTIAL
AUTOMATIC SWITCHES
10
9
AE4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - TEST UNIT FOR DIFFERENTIAL
AUTOMATIC SWITCHES. (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
10
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
11
MUAD
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
1
EPIB
DAB
1
1
Ref: 0453-451/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
11
MUAD/SOF
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
12
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
13
0431PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
14
0431PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
15
0431IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
16
0431CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
17
0431TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
18
0431MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
ENERGY INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0453-452/10S
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
LIELBA.
"ENERGY " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
AE5
APPLICATION - RELAY CONTROL
STATION,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
OVERCURRENT RELAY AND FAULT TO EARTH.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER 25 / 5 A.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
AERIAL LINE MODEL.
ALI01
REL23
TRA10
CON01
CAR18
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
AE5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - RELAY CONTROL STATION
10
3
AE5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - RELAY CONTROL STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
4
AE6
APPLICATION - ENERGY COUNTERS CONTROL
STATION,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
FIXED RESISTIVE LOAD, 150 OHM, 500 W.
ENERGY COUNTER.
3-PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER 380 / 220 V, 630
VA.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER 25 / 5 A.
1
ALI01
CAR01
MED72
TRA04
TRA10
1
1
1
1
1
5
AE6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - ENERGY COUNTERS CONTROL
STATION
10
6
AE6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - ENERGY COUNTERS CONTROL
STATION. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
AE7
APPLICATION - MULTI-FUNCTIONAL ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION STATION,INCLUDED
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
3-PHASE VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD (CUSTOMMADE).
3-PHASE CAPACITIVE LOAD.
3-PHASE INDUCTIVE LOAD.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
MULTI-FUNCTION PROTECTION RELAY (SOFTWARE
INCLUDED).
3-PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER 380 / 220 V, 630
VA.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER 25 / 5 A.
1
ALI01
CAR08
CAR11
CAR14
CON01
REL22
TRA04
TRA10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
AE7/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - MULTI-FUNCTIONAL ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION STATION
10
9
AE7/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - MULTI-FUNCTIONAL ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION STATION. (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
Ref: 0453-452/10S
ITEM
10
2 / 3
REFERENCE
AE9
ALI01
REL20
CON01
TRA04
TRA10
CAR08
CAR11
CAR14
DESCRIPTION
APPLICATION - DIRECTIONAL RELAY: EARTH
FAULT DETECTION. DIRECTIONAL POWER FLOW
DETECTION. REACTIVE POWER FLOW DETECTION,
INCLUDED
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
1-PHASE DIRECTIONAL RELAY.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
3-PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER 380 / 220 V, 630
VA.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER 25 / 5 A.
3-PHASE VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD (CUSTOMMADE).
3-PHASE CAPACITIVE LOAD.
3-PHASE INDUCTIVE LOAD.
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
AE9/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - DIRECTIONAL RELAY: EARTH
FAULT DETECTION. DIRECTIONAL POWER FLOW
DETECTION. REACTIVE POWER FLOW DETECTION
10
12
AE9/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - DIRECTIONAL RELAY: EARTH
FAULT DETECTION. DIRECTIONAL POWER FLOW
DETECTION. REACTIVE POWER FLOW DETECTION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
13
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
14
MUAD
1
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
15
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
16
0432PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
17
0432PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
18
0432IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
19
0432CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
20
0432TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
21
0432MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0453-452/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
ENERGY INSTALLATIONS (5 MUAD)
Ref: 0453/5A
ITEM
1
1 / 1
REFERENCE
MUAD
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
QTY.
5
5
5
5
issue:01/11
ENERGY: MODULAR POWER SYSTEM SIMULATOR. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 0510
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
MPSSC
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
ERP-PD.
ERP-PDF.
ERP-MF
MODULAR POWER SYSTEM SIMULATOR WITH SCADA
CONTROL SYSTEM, FORMED BY:
SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM
BASIC FRAME
GENERATION GROUP
AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
AC MOTORS SPEED CONTROLLER
STEP-UP TRANSFORMER
STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER
TRANSMISSION LINES SIMULATION UNIT
ENERGY CONSUMPTION MODULE
BUSBAR MODEL 1 (GENERATION)
BUSBAR MODEL 2 (TRANSPORT)
BUSBAR MODEL 3 (COUPLING)
BUSBAR MODEL 4 (CONSUMPTION)
BUSBAR MODEL 5 (TRANSPORT)
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
SYNCHRONISMS MODULE
GENERATOR PROTECTION MODULE
GENERATORS PROTECTION AND CONTROL DEVICE
UNIT
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY UNIT
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION RELAY UNIT
FAULT INJECTION MODULE
1
1
1
2
0510PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0510PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0510IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0510CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0510TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0510MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
SCADA
BASB
EGMG/P
AVR/P
VVCA/MP
TRANS/3A
TRANS/3B
AE1.
AE11
BUS01
BUS02
BUS03
BUS04
BUS05
ALI01
IND05
INX20/P
ERP-PGC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 0510
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Modular Power System Simulator with
SCADA Control System
MPSSC
Technical Teaching Equipment
SCADA
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The “MPSSC” is a modular Power System Simulator with SCADA Control System, specially designed for Technicians at Technical and Vocational
level.
The simulator will include the main parts of a Power System as:
! Generation.
! Transformation.
! Transport.
! Distribution.
! Consumption.
It will include important and key elements that play a very important roll in a Power System control and protection, as:
- Automatic voltage regulator.
- Automatic frequency control.
- All the main protection relays involved.
- Automatic and Manual synchronization.
The simulator includes the following modules:
- SCADA Control System.
- EGMG/P. Generation Group.
- AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator.
- VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller.
- TRANS/3A. Step-up Transformer.
- TRANS/3B. Step-down Transformer.
- AE1. Transmission Lines Simulation Unit.
- AE11. Energy Consumption Module.
- BUS01. Busbar model 1 (Generation).
- BUS02. Busbar model 2 (Transport).
- BUS05. Busbar model 5 (Transport).
- BUS03. Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
- BUS04. Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
- ALI01. Power Supply.
- IND05. Synchronims Module.
- INX20/P. Generator Protection Module.
- ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit.
- ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module.
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Page 1
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
MODULES IN DETAIL
SCADA
SCADA Control System
Generation
Transport/Lines
Transformation
Consumption
TRANS/3A.
Step-up Transformer
EGMG/P. Generation Group
AE1.
Transmission Lines Simulation Unit
AE11.
Energy Consumption Module
TRANS/3B.
Step-down Transformer
AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller
Control and Protections
Busbars
-ALI01.
-INX20/P.
-IND05.
-BUS01.
Power Supply.
Generator Protection Module.
Synchronims Module.
Busbar model 1 (Generation).
-BUS02.
-BUS05.
-BUS03.
-BUS04.
Busbar model 2 (Transport).
Busbar model 5 (Transport).
Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit
Faults
ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module
Page 2
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System
SPECIFICATIONS
SCADA is an industry-standard supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) software for realistic experience of power system control.
For use with MPSSC Simulator to increase students´ understanding of power systems.
It can connect to multiple generation systems for remote control and supervision of local generation and distributed generation.
It includes alarms and logs data for detailed analysis of MPSSC during stable and transient operation.
It communicates with programmable logic controllers (PLCs), numerical protection relays, automatic voltage regulators and prime-mover
simulation device of the Power System Simulator to control and collect information from the power system.
Includes high performance computer with integrated communication interface to exchange information with all devices.
Remotely controls the generator and prime-mover of the MPSSC Simulator in different power system operation control methods (frequency
control, voltage control, active power control, reactive power control, power factor control, generators load exchange).
The SCADA connects to MPSSC to train students in supervision and control of power systems.
The package includes industrial-standard SCADA software, a computer, colour printer and communications hardware.
EDIBON supplies the software already installed on the computer. The software does several jobs, including remote control and data display and
logging. It includes programs written by EDIBON to match experiments which students have done directly with the MPSSC Simulator. The
software´s on-screen display or ´user interface´shows real-time data and mimics the circuit-breakers (opening and closing). It also mimics the
adjustment of the loads and any faults applied by the user. Other screens give details about the settings and data collected at each protection relay
or instrument on the simulator.
Students select the correct screen for the experiment they want to perform. They then use the computer to close circuit-breakers, set and adjust any
loads and connect the grid supply (or start the generator) by mean of touch screens, in others words, they configure the topology of the Simulator.
The generators synchronization can be performed in manual and automatic mode with the help of SCADA.
Students can use the software to log data from the simulator and analyse it, compare conditions before and after faults, and see the effects of
faults. They can use this information to predict power system problems and change the power system protection to prevent future problems.
The software includes the experiments already given with the MPSSC Simulator.
contiue...
Page 3
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS
The experiments include:
- Generator characteristics and performance.
- Transformers.
- Transmission, distribution and consumption.
- Power system protection.
- Power system operation and control in different modes.
- Power flow control.
- etc.
SCADA allows the control and supervision of the operations related to the generation, transformation, transmission and distribution of the
electrical energy made by the MPSSC Simulator.
Through a sophisticated human-machine interface, executed in a computer, it is possible to monitor and control a lot of events and alarms as well
as analyse, display and control the information acquired from all Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVRs),
protection relays and prime mover simulation device.
SCADA system is connected to the PLCs communication networks, protection relays and the rest of the units of the MPSSC Simulator, allowing the
data acquisition and control in real time from all the elements of the MPSSC Simulator. The acquired data are stored for their future analysis or
they are directly sent to screens connected to the computer as a visual information.
The objective of the SCADA developed architecture is centralising and automating all the control tasks, monitoring, protection and data
acquisition of the MPSSC Simulator is operated similar to local or central load dispatch center of Real Electrical Power System.
The equipments connected to the SCADA I make one or some of the following functions:
1.-
Respond to the commands of the control computer, in order to close or open all the circuit breaker contacts, power isolator and the rest
of the equipments that conform the topology of the Power System Simulator.
2.-
Transmit to SCADA the ON/OFF state of the electrical equipment that conform the Simulated Electrical Power System.
3.-
Vary all the set points of the controlled parameters, for example, the frequency control, active power, reactive power, power factor and
voltage control set point.
4.-
Measurement and management of all the acquired electrical parameters in different nodes and points of the simulated power system.
5.-
Protection of the electrical circuits and the equipments that conform the MPSSC Simulator.
SCADA allows making a control, supervision and data acquisition in a centralised and remote way, simulating a central generation dispatch
center.
With help of SCADA, students can observe the real time state of the electrical equipment of the MPSSC by means of graphical and state screens.
With SCADA, the operator of the electrical power system can monitor its state and consequently, it can act and make decisions about how to
operate in different conditions. For example, when there is a sound or visual alarm, the operator can see what is happening in a SCADA screen,
because the monitoring system includes an alarm sequences and events list of all the equipment operation, recordered throughout the practice
period and can done, reports about a determined operation or about the complete practice.
Another SCADA facility is that it allows visualise in a central way all the instrumentation of the MPSSC. Simulator through several screens with
digital and analogical virtual instruments.
In the MPSSC. Simulator, several multifunctional and numeric protection relays are used, because the study of the electrical protections is an
essential point for a electrical power system.
The protection relays include measurement, communication and programmable logic possibilities to done functions of monitories and control of
the equipment that are protecting. Thanks to these facilities, the protection functions are incorporated and managed from SCADA, making the
teaching of this subject easier in a automated and centralised way, because the students can communicate with each protection relay and
managed it remotely.
Page 4
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
Examples of some possibilities
Page 5
www.edibon.com
ALI01. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS
This module has the followings elements:
One three-phase power supply output connector.
One three-phase power supply output with red, yellow and green connectors.
Two single-phase power supply output.
One single-phase standard type power supply output.
Ground terminal.
One security key.
One emergency stop switch.
Module state indicators.
A removable key 6 with two positions (ON and OFF) acts as main switch.
EGMG/P. Generation Group
SPECIFICATIONS
This group has the followings elements:
1.One three-phase AC squirrel cage induction motor acting as generation prime mover.
2.One three-phase Synchronous generator with DC field excitation.
The induction motor is controlled from the VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller.
INX20/P. Generator Protection Module
SPECIFICATIONS
Page 6
www.edibon.com
VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller
SPECIFICATIONS
The VVCA/MP is an AC motor speed regulator.
The numerous inputs and outputs allow you to use the VVCA/MP for power supply standard asynchronous ac motor for simulation of prime mover
of generation system.
Each part of the VVCA/MP is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
Elements of the AVR/P:
Ground protection connector.
Three-Phase power output supply connectors.
Control enable/disable switch.
Remote/Local mode switch.
Local control set-point slider.
Input/Output ERP-PGC signal connector.
Input/Output AVR signal connector.
Power supply Switch.
The capacity range of VVCA/MP is for 3 ph 400 V supply from 0.4 kW to 7 kW. The overload capacity of VVCA/MP is 150% for 1 min and 200% for
3s (in High Duty mode). The inverters with capacities of 5.5 kW and above can be used in dual rating; this means that the same inverter can be
used for next higher capacity (in Low Duty mode). For example a 5.5 kW inverter can be used for a 7.5 kW motor; in this case the overload is 120%
for 1 min. The braking transistor is included as standard. The braking resistor is included as standard up to 7.5 kW units.
The main features of VVCA/MP are:
Safety enables input (compliant to EN954-1 category 3).
Built-in EMC filter for all capacities (compliant to EN 61800-3, category C3).
Sensorless vector control mode (100% torque at 0 Hz).
Advanced PID functions (dancer control).
Brake control function.
Logic gates for logic combination of input and output functions and delay timer (10steps). Positioning function (when encoder option is used).
3 slots for 3 different options at the same time (encoder, fieldbus, I/O expansion).
Removable control terminals (cage clamp type).
AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
SPECIFICATIONS
The AVR/P is an Automatic Voltage Regulator that works in conjunction with the ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit.
The numerous inputs and outputs allow you to use the AVR/P for voltage, reactive power and power factor regulation of generation system.
Each part of the AVR/P is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
Elements of the AVR/P:
Ground protection connector.
Generator output voltage measurement connectors.
Generator Field excitation output supply connectors.
Voltage Control enable/disable switch.
Remote/Local mode switch.
Input/Output signal connector.
Local control set-point slider.
Serial Port connector( Software HMI is optional product).
Power supply Switch.
The AVR/P is an automatic voltage regulator of the latest design for synchronous generators and synchronous motors. The unit contains the most
advanced microprocessor technology together with IGBT semiconductor technology (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor).
This advanced-design automatic voltage regulator is used for the excitation of indirectly excited synchronous machines. This unit is only suitable for
this one area of application.
The regulator can also be switched over to function as a reactive power, power factor and field current regulator.
Page 7
www.edibon.com
TRANS/3A. Step-up Transformer
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase power transformer with group connection YyN0, 400/400V, 2kVA, 50-60Hz.
This unit simulates the STEP-UP transformer located in the transmission substation.
TRANS/3B. Step-down Transformer
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase power transformer with group connection YyN0, 400/230V, 2kVA, 50-60Hz.
This unit simulates the STEP-DOWN transformer located in the distribution substation.
IND05. Synchronims Module
SPECIFICATIONS
This module has the followings elements:
Phase Synchronization Lamps.
Phase RST sequences test connectors.
Page 8
www.edibon.com
Busbars
BUS01. Busbar model 1
(Generation)
BUS02. Busbar model 2
(Transport)
BUS05. Busbar model 5
(Transport)
BUS03. Busbar model 3
(Coupling)
BUS04. Busbar model 4
(Consumption)
SPECIFICATIONS
The finality of these modules is to represent the generation, transmission, distribution and subtransmission substations busbars and it included the
main commutation elements as power circuit breaker, isolating switches, double busbar. With the aid of these modules is possible to coupling or
decoupling all necessary elements of the power system simulator.
Basically the busbars modules have similar elements, as:
- Input/Outputs double BusBar power connectors.
- Single-phase power supply input.
- 89L-1 and 89L-2 isolators open/close selectors.
- 52L circuit breaker open/close selector.
- 89L-3 isolator open/close selector.
- Manual/Remote operation enable switch.
- Input/Output signals control connector.
Page 9
www.edibon.com
AE1. Transmission Lines Simulation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
This unit represents basic concepts of the Electric Energy high-voltage three-phase transmission lines operation. It simulates a value modifying
concentrated parameter line that allows different configurations and consists on three conductorline (R, S, T) and a Neutral or return line (N).
Each of the phases is represented, following the concentrated parameters theoretical model, through a resistance series association and
inductance, along with a parallel association between each one of them in a capacitance effect.
A way to reduce the earth short circuit current is to have impedance in the neutral-to-ground connections. This impedance has no repercussion in
the normal functioning of the network but they introduce a repercussion in the increase of 3x Zo (impedance on the zero sequence component),
which reduces the short circuit current.
The return line is simulated through small value impedance that has a resistive-indicative characteristic. To simplify the effect, being a despicable
inductance, it will be simulated with a pure 10 resistance.
The phases have two terminals at the input and two at the output, and they are connected at the interior. Through one of them the module will be
supplied. Through the last one the natural circuit will continue to the load module, the bar module, the transformer, etc. The two terminals left en
every phase is left for assembly of protection relay or other parallel configurations.
The supply of this unit will be done through line terminals (R, S, and T) and the neutral (N) through a 400V three-phase supply and it will be
controlled by an interrupter-circuit breaker of 4 poles placed between the supply and the lines module.
In the phases we can distinguish different resistance and inductance values, being able to simulate different length transport lines.
The resistive part is formed by two resistance values of 15 and 33
obtaining two additions resistive values of 10.31 and 48 .
, with the possibility of making parallel-series connections between them,
The inductive part consists on a multistage coil of despicable resistance. In which it is possible to choose one of the following values:
33 mH, 78 mH, 140 mH, 193 mH, 236 mH
The capacitive part will be divided into capacitance between conductors and capacitance between line and ground.
The capacitance between conductors is simulated with a pair of capacitors at the beginning and at the end of the line with different values: 0.5 F
and 1 F for each conductor.
The capacitance between conductor and ground is 1 F and 2 F, also at the beginning and at the end of the line.
With all this values it is possible to simulate a great number of line configurations, beginning with different line distances with different types of
conductor, through the unbalanced lines with different conductors groups (Simplex, Duplex, Triplex and Cuadruplex). At the same time it is possible
to simulate transient state with different short-circuits injection using a fault injection module.
The unit is protected with a grounding connection that comes from the metallic caging and that is accessible through a terminal in the front of the
module.
Page 10
www.edibon.com
AE11. Energy Consumption Module
SPECIFICATIONS
With this module is possible to simulate any proper consumption in the power system or we can test any element of the power system separately
under different load conditions.
It has differentiated part on resistive, inductive and capacitive zones and it allows all types of combinations between them, so we can simulate pure
resistive, inductive and capacitive load as well as different series-parallel combination of them.
Metallic box.
Diagram in the front panel.
Variable resistive loads: 3 x [ 150 W (500 W) ].
Fixed resistive loads:
3 x [ 150 W (500 W) + 150 W (500 W) ].
Inductive loads:
6 x [ 0, 33, 78, 140, 193, 236 mH ].(2 A Max.).
Capacitive loads:
3 x [ 3 x 3.5 mF ] + 3 x [ 3 x 7 mF ] + 3 x [ 3 x 14 mF ].
Ground connector.
Page 11
www.edibon.com
ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
The ERP-PGC is a control unit for engine-generator simulator system.
The numerous inputs and outputs, along with a modular software structure, allow you to use the ERP-PGC for a wide range of applications with only
a single part number. This includes stand-by, AMF (automatic mains failure), peak shaving, import-export or distributed generation, among others.
Also the ERP-PGC is compatible for island, island parallel, mains parallel and multiple unit mains parallel operations.
Each part of the ERP-PGC is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
All the adjustments are executed with the management software from a PC.
Elements of the ERP-PGC:
Power input/output connectors.
Multifunction control and protection device.
Generator group control inputs and outputs connector.
Generator rotor to ground protection Relay.
Isolated operation connector(52GT state and 52G trip command).
Functions:
Prime mover control.
Engine, mains and generator protection.
Engine data measurement :
Oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, battery voltage, speed, service hours, etc.
Generator and mains data measurement:
Voltage, current, power, kVar, kW, kWh, etc.
Load/Var sharing for up to 32 participants.
Load-dependent start/stop.
Automatic, Manual, and Stop operating modes.
Application modes:
1.No CB (Circuit Breaker) operation.
2.Open GCB (Generator Circuit Breaker).
3.Open/close GCB.
4.Open/close GCB/MCB (Generator CB/Main Circuit Breaker).
Logics Manager for processing measured values, discrete inputs, and internal states.
Engine starter sequencing.
Alarm display with circuit breaker trip and engine shutdown.
AMF (automatic mains failure) standby genset control, with automatic engine start on mains failure detection and open transition breaker control.
Critical mode operation.
Synchronizing (phase matching and slip frequency) and mains parallel operation.
External frequency, voltage, power, and power factor set point control via analogue input or interface.
FIFO (First Input First Output) event history with 300 entries.
ECU data visualization via J1939.
CAN bus communication to engine controllers, plant management systems, expansion boards, and Toolkit configuration and visualization
software.
RS-485 Modbus communication with plant management systems.
RS-232 Modbus communication with plant management systems.
Page 12
www.edibon.com
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
The ERP-PD is a transmission line protection device.
The numerous inputs and outputs, along with a modular software structure, allow you to use the ERP-PD for study and analyze the performance of
different transmission line protection system.
Each part of the ERP-PD is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
All the adjustments are executed with the management software from a PC.
Elements of the ERP-PD:
Power input/output connectors.
Protection device.
Outputs connector for trip command.
Functions:
Protection:Optimize line protection with a system of sensitive, secure, and dependable three-pole trip relay elements.
Monitoring: Simplify fault and system disturbance analyses with event reports and Sequential Events Recorder.
Fault Locator: Isolate line problems, and restore service faster.
Automation.
Remote communications capabilities and elimination of external control elements.
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
The ERP-PDF is a differential protection device.
The numerous inputs and outputs, along with a modular software structure, allow you to use the ERP-PDF for study and analyze the performance of
different differential protection system.
Each part of the ERP-PDF is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
All the adjustments are executed with the management software from a PC.
Elements of the ERP-PDF:
Power input/output connectors.
Protection device.
Outputs connector for trip command.
Functions:
It provides current differential protection plus two complete groups of overcurrent elements in one compact package. The relay measures high- and
low-side currents, differential operate and restraint quantities, as well as second and fifth harmonics of the applied currents. The unit provides two
optoisolated inputs, four programmable output contacts, and one alarm output contact.
This relay can protect two-winding power transformers, reactors, generators, large motors, and other two-terminal power apparatus. The relay
settings permit you to use wye or delta connected high- and low-side current transformers. The relay compensates for various equipment and CT
connections to derive appropriate differential operating quantities.
The ERP-PDF provides three differential elements with dual slope characteristics. The second slope provides security against CT saturation for heavy
through faults.
Page 13
www.edibon.com
ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module
SPECIFICATIONS
The fault injection module have the possibility to inject different kind of short-circuits, in any point of the power system simulator including line
module, directly or through a pure resistive element.
Employing this element we can analyze line performance during transient state as well as analyze the line protection elements functionality.
The short-circuit injection possibility are:
Three-pole short-circuit.
Two-pole short-circuit.
Two-pole-ground short-circuit.
Single-pole-ground short-circuit.
Page 14
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
ENERGY: MODULAR POWER SIMULATOR (ESN)
Ref: 0511
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
MPPSC/ESN
SCADA NET SYSTEM (ESN) FOR MODULAR POWER
SYSTEM SIMULATOR WITH SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM
(30 STUDENTS WORKING "SIMULTANEOUSLY")
1
2
0520PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0520PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0520IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0520CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0520TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0520MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0511
2 / 2
SPECIFICATIONS:
-Mini-ESN system main possibilities:
. 30 students “simultaneously” work.
. Any student can work simultaneously doing “Real Time Control”.
. The teacher "can see" in his computer what any student is doing in any computer at any time.
. The unit and system can be visualised simultaneously in "n" screens.
This system is common for any EDIBON Computer Control unit, but need individual Software Applications for each
particular unit.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
With this module 30 students working simulatenously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Modular Power System Simulator with
SCADA Control System
MPSSC
Technical Teaching Equipment
SCADA
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The “MPSSC” is a modular Power System Simulator with SCADA Control System, specially designed for Technicians at Technical and Vocational
level.
The simulator will include the main parts of a Power System as:
! Generation.
! Transformation.
! Transport.
! Distribution.
! Consumption.
It will include important and key elements that play a very important roll in a Power System control and protection, as:
- Automatic voltage regulator.
- Automatic frequency control.
- All the main protection relays involved.
- Automatic and Manual synchronization.
The simulator includes the following modules:
- SCADA Control System.
- EGMG/P. Generation Group.
- AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator.
- VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller.
- TRANS/3A. Step-up Transformer.
- TRANS/3B. Step-down Transformer.
- AE1. Transmission Lines Simulation Unit.
- AE11. Energy Consumption Module.
- BUS01. Busbar model 1 (Generation).
- BUS02. Busbar model 2 (Transport).
- BUS05. Busbar model 5 (Transport).
- BUS03. Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
- BUS04. Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
- ALI01. Power Supply.
- IND05. Synchronims Module.
- INX20/P. Generator Protection Module.
- ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit.
- ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module.
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Page 1
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
MODULES IN DETAIL
SCADA
SCADA Control System
Generation
Transport/Lines
Transformation
Consumption
TRANS/3A.
Step-up Transformer
EGMG/P. Generation Group
AE1.
Transmission Lines Simulation Unit
AE11.
Energy Consumption Module
TRANS/3B.
Step-down Transformer
AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller
Control and Protections
Busbars
-ALI01.
-INX20/P.
-IND05.
-BUS01.
Power Supply.
Generator Protection Module.
Synchronims Module.
Busbar model 1 (Generation).
-BUS02.
-BUS05.
-BUS03.
-BUS04.
Busbar model 2 (Transport).
Busbar model 5 (Transport).
Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit
Faults
ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module
Page 2
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System
SPECIFICATIONS
SCADA is an industry-standard supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) software for realistic experience of power system control.
For use with MPSSC Simulator to increase students´ understanding of power systems.
It can connect to multiple generation systems for remote control and supervision of local generation and distributed generation.
It includes alarms and logs data for detailed analysis of MPSSC during stable and transient operation.
It communicates with programmable logic controllers (PLCs), numerical protection relays, automatic voltage regulators and prime-mover
simulation device of the Power System Simulator to control and collect information from the power system.
Includes high performance computer with integrated communication interface to exchange information with all devices.
Remotely controls the generator and prime-mover of the MPSSC Simulator in different power system operation control methods (frequency
control, voltage control, active power control, reactive power control, power factor control, generators load exchange).
The SCADA connects to MPSSC to train students in supervision and control of power systems.
The package includes industrial-standard SCADA software, a computer, colour printer and communications hardware.
EDIBON supplies the software already installed on the computer. The software does several jobs, including remote control and data display and
logging. It includes programs written by EDIBON to match experiments which students have done directly with the MPSSC Simulator. The
software´s on-screen display or ´user interface´shows real-time data and mimics the circuit-breakers (opening and closing). It also mimics the
adjustment of the loads and any faults applied by the user. Other screens give details about the settings and data collected at each protection relay
or instrument on the simulator.
Students select the correct screen for the experiment they want to perform. They then use the computer to close circuit-breakers, set and adjust any
loads and connect the grid supply (or start the generator) by mean of touch screens, in others words, they configure the topology of the Simulator.
The generators synchronization can be performed in manual and automatic mode with the help of SCADA.
Students can use the software to log data from the simulator and analyse it, compare conditions before and after faults, and see the effects of
faults. They can use this information to predict power system problems and change the power system protection to prevent future problems.
The software includes the experiments already given with the MPSSC Simulator.
contiue...
Page 3
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS
The experiments include:
- Generator characteristics and performance.
- Transformers.
- Transmission, distribution and consumption.
- Power system protection.
- Power system operation and control in different modes.
- Power flow control.
- etc.
SCADA allows the control and supervision of the operations related to the generation, transformation, transmission and distribution of the
electrical energy made by the MPSSC Simulator.
Through a sophisticated human-machine interface, executed in a computer, it is possible to monitor and control a lot of events and alarms as well
as analyse, display and control the information acquired from all Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVRs),
protection relays and prime mover simulation device.
SCADA system is connected to the PLCs communication networks, protection relays and the rest of the units of the MPSSC Simulator, allowing the
data acquisition and control in real time from all the elements of the MPSSC Simulator. The acquired data are stored for their future analysis or
they are directly sent to screens connected to the computer as a visual information.
The objective of the SCADA developed architecture is centralising and automating all the control tasks, monitoring, protection and data
acquisition of the MPSSC Simulator is operated similar to local or central load dispatch center of Real Electrical Power System.
The equipments connected to the SCADA I make one or some of the following functions:
1.-
Respond to the commands of the control computer, in order to close or open all the circuit breaker contacts, power isolator and the rest
of the equipments that conform the topology of the Power System Simulator.
2.-
Transmit to SCADA the ON/OFF state of the electrical equipment that conform the Simulated Electrical Power System.
3.-
Vary all the set points of the controlled parameters, for example, the frequency control, active power, reactive power, power factor and
voltage control set point.
4.-
Measurement and management of all the acquired electrical parameters in different nodes and points of the simulated power system.
5.-
Protection of the electrical circuits and the equipments that conform the MPSSC Simulator.
SCADA allows making a control, supervision and data acquisition in a centralised and remote way, simulating a central generation dispatch
center.
With help of SCADA, students can observe the real time state of the electrical equipment of the MPSSC by means of graphical and state screens.
With SCADA, the operator of the electrical power system can monitor its state and consequently, it can act and make decisions about how to
operate in different conditions. For example, when there is a sound or visual alarm, the operator can see what is happening in a SCADA screen,
because the monitoring system includes an alarm sequences and events list of all the equipment operation, recordered throughout the practice
period and can done, reports about a determined operation or about the complete practice.
Another SCADA facility is that it allows visualise in a central way all the instrumentation of the MPSSC. Simulator through several screens with
digital and analogical virtual instruments.
In the MPSSC. Simulator, several multifunctional and numeric protection relays are used, because the study of the electrical protections is an
essential point for a electrical power system.
The protection relays include measurement, communication and programmable logic possibilities to done functions of monitories and control of
the equipment that are protecting. Thanks to these facilities, the protection functions are incorporated and managed from SCADA, making the
teaching of this subject easier in a automated and centralised way, because the students can communicate with each protection relay and
managed it remotely.
Page 4
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
Examples of some possibilities
Page 5
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
MAIN ADVANCED RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0531/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EESTC
EESTC.Unit
EESTC/CIB
DAB
EESTC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
THERMAL SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT,COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
THERMAL SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR THERMAL SOLAR
ENERGY EQUIPMENT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION +DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR THERMAL SOLAR
ENERGY EQUIPMENT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EESTC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
THERMAL SOLAR ENERGY (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
EESTC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
THERMAL SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT,COMPUTER
CONTROLLED
10
4
EESFC
PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC
SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT
STANDARD PCI DATA ACQUISITION BOARD FOR
PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR
ENERGY EQUIPMENT
1
EESFC.Unit
EESFC/CIB
EESFC-DAS
EESFC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
EESFC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR ENERGY (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
6
EESFC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR ENERGY EQUIPMENT,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED
10
7
EEEC
WIND ENERGY UNIT, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
WIND ENERGY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR WIND ENERGY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR WIND ENERGY UNIT
1
EEEC.Unit
EEEC/CIB
DAB
EEEC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
EEEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR WIND
ENERGY (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
9
EEEC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
WIND ENERGY UNIT, COMPUTER CONTROLLED
10
10
EE-KIT
KIT OF CONVERSION AND CONSUMPTION
SIMULATION (AC)
2
11
EE-KIT2
GRID CONNECTION INVERTER KIT
2
12
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
13
0531PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
Ref: 0531/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
14
0531PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
15
0531IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
16
0531CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
17
0531TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
18
0531MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Alternative Energies
EESTC. Computer Controlled Thermal Solar Energy Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: EESTC. Thermal Solar Energy Unit
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EESTC Unit:
The unit is a system that transforms solar energy into calorific energy. This unit uses the thermosiphon system to heat water or
the traditional pumping system. In both cases,the absorbed calorific energy is given by the solar radiation simulated, in our
case, by a panel with powerful luminous sources.
Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel.
Solar panel (Thermal solar collector): Steel structure. Piped (already prepared) to connect the panel and the accumulator.
Closed expansion vessel. Over pressure security valve. Two manometers. Temperature sensors.
Thermal accumulator tank: Vacuum vitrified heater, high efficiency heating and anticorrosion protections. It has a
supporting heating group, with a regulation electric resistor. Contact thermostat to control temperature.
Solar simulator: Aluminum structure regulated in height. Sixteen ultraviolet lamps of 300 W each one. Electricity security
group, made up by 3 magnetothermic. Feed wire.
Pumping equipment: Impulse pump. 3 Flowmeters.
10 Temperature sensors. 2 Flow sensors.
EESTC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up
to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EESTC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200x1200x2005 mm. Weight: 300 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
2
1 .- Study of how the thermosiphon works.
2 .- Study of the lamp illumination profile.
3 .- Study of the solar collector efficiency.
4 .- Free circulation: Inclination angle
influence on the equipment efficiency.
5 .- Relationship between the flow and the
temperature.
6 .- Energy balance of the solar collector.
7 .- Energy balance in the accumulator
tank.
8 .- Experimental efficiency determination.
9 .- Influence of the incidence angle over
the temperature.
Other possible practices:
10.-Sensors calibration.
11.-Flowmeter calibration.
12-30.- Practices with PLC.
5.- Energy
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/EESTC.pdf
EESFC. Computer Controlled Photovoltaic Solar Energy Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: EESFC. Photovoltaic
Solar Energy Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EESFC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure, galvanized steel and stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with
similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2 Photovoltaic polycrystalline panels.
Solar simulator: structure adjustable in height, 16 ultraviolet lamps of 300 W each one, kit of electric
security, made up of 3 thermomagnetic switches, power cable.
Sensors: temperature sensors, instantaneous current sensors, instantaneous voltage sensors,
instantaneous power sensors, Rms current sensors, Rms voltage sensors, Rms power sensors.
Load regulator, with LED indicator of state and with protection diodes. Adjustable load.
OPTIONAL (not included in the standard supply):
EESFC-KIT. Kit of charge, conversion and consumption simulation:
Energy accumulation and voltages conversion: 2 Batteries, 35 A./hour. Inverter, 150W.
Different loads: fluorescent lamps. Incandescent lamps. DC Motor, 12V. AC Motor, 220V.
2 EESFC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process.
Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’
values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external
interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit,
electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EESFC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of
data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the registration of the
alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200x1200x2005 mm. Weight: 300 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm.
Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/
alternativeenergies/EESFC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 77
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Lamps illumination profile
study.
2.- Efficiency experimental
determination.
3.- Influence of the angle of
incidence on the
temperature.
4.- Determination of the
material that makes up the
solar cell.
5.- Determination of the p and
n side of a solar cell.
6.- Determination of the first
quadrant of the I-V curve,
without illumination of the
solar cell.
7.- Determination of the
inverse current or the
saturation current with
regard to a solar cell
without illumination.
8.- Determination of the
resistance in series and in
parallel of a solar cell
without illumination.
9.- Dependence of the voltage
of open circuit ( Voc ) with
the lumens.
10.- D e t e r m i n a t i o n t h e
characteristic parameters
of a solar cell with
illumination.
11.- Relation of the maximum
power with the power input.
12.- D e t e r m i n a t e o f t h e
parameters that define the
quality of a solar cell.
13.- Solar cell measurement.
14.- Measurement of the solar
panel voltage in the
vacuum.
15.- Determination of the cells
disposition in a solar panel.
16.- M e a s u r e m e n t o f t h e
maximum power for a solar
panel with load.
17.- Measurement of the solar
panel voltage in the
vacuum with constant
illumination and different
temperature.
18.- Study of V,I,W according to
different loads.
19.- Familiarization with the
regulator parameters.
Other possible practices:
20.- Sensors calibration.
Practices to be done with the
OPTIONAL KIT “EESFC-KIT”:
21.- Connection of loads to
direct voltage.
22.- Connection of loads to
alternating voltage of 220
V.
23-41.-Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
5.3- Alternative Energies
(continuation)
MINI-EESF. Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer "MINI-EESF", is a
laboratory scaled unit designed to study all the parameters governing
the Solar radiation direct conversion into electricity.
The trainer is based on a panel or framework in which some
application modules can be installed, and on photovoltaic solar
panels that can be assembled in mobile structures.
Supply to the public network or an alternating consumption.
Photovoltaic module:
1.- Determination of the constituent
material of the solar cell.
2.- Determination of the I-V first
quadrant curve without illuminating
the solar cell.
3.- Determination of the inverse (or
saturation) current of the cell without
illumination.
Solar panel mounted on an anodized aluminum structure with wheels
for mobility, and with calibrated cell to measure the solar irradiation.
It consists of 36 high performance single-cristal silicon photovoltaic
4.- Determination of parallel and series
resistance of a solar cell without
illumination.
cells (35x55 mm), with a typical power of 50Wp for a 17Vdc voltage.
5.- Dependency of the open circuit
Both the protections and the used materials give it water proof
voltage (Voc) with lumens (luminous
properties, abrasion protection, hail impact protection and several
other adverse environmental factors protection.
Technical data:
flux).
6.- Determination of the parameters
that describe the quality of a solar
Maximum nominal power: 66W. Voltage on Pmax point (Vmp):
cell.
17.8 V. Intensity on Pmax point (Imp): 3.70 A. Short-circuit current
7.- Measurement of the solar energy.
(Isc): 4.05 A. Open circuit voltage (Voc): 22.25 V.
8.- Measurement of the solar panel
Dimensions: (length x width x thickness) 780 x 660 x 35.5 mm.
Weight: 3 Kg. approx.
Anodized aluminum practices framework. Battery offering optimal
performance with low power applications. Capacity: 32Ah with 96
Wh per day. Set of interconnection cables. Solar energy calculations
voltage in vacuum.
9.- Determination of the disposition of
cells in a solar panel.
10.- Familiarisation with the regulator
parameters.
software (CD-ROM).
11.- Loads connection to a 12 Volts DC.
ES10.
12.- Loads connection to a 220 Volts
Electronic regulation module (charge regulator), including
a LCD screen. Charge regulator admits 12-24V voltage.
Its reading allows to know the charging state of the battery,
5.- Energy
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
as well as the panel charging current. Moreover, the
regulator has an add-on security: protection against
polarity inversion and short-circuit, through electronic
protection against overload, fuse-protected and extremely
low electromagnetic waves emission.
ES20.
Loads module. Incorporating two 12 V, 50W lamps, with
independent switches.
ES30.
Converter module from DC to AC. The so called DC/AC
converter is an inverter for DC to AC conversion. The
output voltage is a semi-sinusoidal 220 V, 50 Hz or 110 V,
60 Hz. The output power is 150 W for direct power and a
maximum power of 300 W, having a 12 Vdc supply.
ES40.
AC Voltage measurements module until 250V. and DC
ES50.
Loads module. Including two lamps of 220V. or 110V., 50
ES60.
Network inverter module. It receives 24 V and supplies sine
until 30 V.
W., with independent switches.
wave alternating voltage of 220 V that is synchronised in
phase with the energy of the public network. It supplies
until 100 W power.
ES60/PC. Network inverter module, which can be controlled by
computer (PC), through RS-232 port.
ES70.
Wattmeter module of alternating current until 750 W.
ES80.
Module for measurements of solar irradiation (W/m2 ) and
measurements of current until 10 A.
ES90.
Module for 12 V. battery control. (A maximum of two
batteries can be incorporated in the module).
Cables and Accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Other versions available:
MINI-EESF/M. Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer.
MINI-EESF/B. Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/MINI-EESF.pdf
Page 78
AC.
5.3- Alternative Energies
(continuation)
EEEC. Computer Controlled Wind Energy Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
4
3
2
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Unit: EEEC. Wind Energy Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EEEC Unit:
This Unit is a laboratory-scale unit designed to study the eolic energy and the influence of some factors on this generation.
Anodized aluminium structure. Main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution
that the elements in the real unit.
Stainless steel tunnel of 2200 x 700 x 700 mm approx., which includes a window of 1100 x 200 mm approx. Aerogenerator
of 6 blades, power: 60 W, aerogenerator diameter: 510mm. Axial fan with speed variation for the wind simulation,
computer controlled.
Sensors:
Temperature (“J” type) sensor.
Air speed sensor: turbulence air speed (instantaneous)and mean speed.
Speed sensor (aerogenerator).
Voltage, current and power sensors: instantaneous current, voltage and power. Rms current, voltage and power.
Load regulator.
Loads module: variable load and fixed load.
OPTIONAL (not included in the standard supply):
EEEC-KIT. Kit of charge, conversion and consumption simulation:
Energy accumulation and voltages conversion: 2 Batteries, 35 A./hour. Inverter,150W.
Different loads: Fluorescent lamps. Incandescent lamps. DC Motor, 12V. AC Motor, 220V.
2 EEEC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EEEC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200 x 700 x 700 mm. Weight:100Kg. Control Interface: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the aerogenerator operation
in function of the wind speed
variation.
2.- Angle of incidence variation.
3.- Load variation influence on the
aerogenerator.
4.- Study of the voltage, power and
current.
5.- Study of V, I, W in function of different
loads.
6.- E f f i c i e n c y e x p e r i m e n t a l
determination.
7.- Wind energy measurement.
8.- Familiarization with the regulator
parameters.
9.- Study of the power generated by he
aerogenerator depending on the
wind speed.
10.- Study of the power generated by the
aerogenerator depending on the air
incident angle.
11.- Sensors calibration.
Practices to be made with the OPTIONAL
KIT “EEEC-KIT”:
12.- Loads connection to direct voltage.
13.- Loads connection to alternating
voltage 220V.
14-32.-Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/EEEC.pdf
BPPC. Computer Controlled Teaching and Researching Biodiesel Pilot Plant
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: BPPC. Teaching and Researching Biodiesel Pilot Plant
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1
2
3
4
5
6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
BPPC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels an main metallic elements in stainless steel .Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit. Alcohol tank. Oil/fat tank. Pre-heater of alcohol. Reflux condenser. Total
condenser. Biodiesel reactor. Cooler. Recovered alcohol tank. Product tank: Glycerin. Product tank: Biodiesel. Temperature
sensors. Flow sensors.
PBBC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
PBBC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/EBDC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 79
www.edibon.com
5.- Energy
1
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0531/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EESTC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR THERMAL SOLAR
ENERGY EQUIPMENT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
EESFC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR
ENERGY EQUIPMENT
1
1
3
PLC-PI
EEEC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR WIND ENERGY UNIT
1
1
4
0531PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
5
0531PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
6
0531IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
7
0531CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
8
0531TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
9
0531MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
Advanced Energy Laboratory
(5AD)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 2
0400. Electricity
0413-410/10S: Domestic Electric Installations (10 CAI + CA
0500. Energy
0520: Energy: Advanced Power Plant Simulator Basi
0521: Energy: Advanced Power Plant Simulator Medium
0800. Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
0813-810/10S: Elementary Fluid Mechanics (10 CAI + CA
0813-811/10S: Elementary Fluid Mechanics (10 CAI + CA
0813-812/10S: Elementary Fluid Mechanics (10 CAI + CAL)
1000. Process Control
1010: Process Control Basic Module
1010/PLC: PLC's Module
1000/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Process Control Unit
Ref.:5AD-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0413-410/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIELBA
"DOMESTIC " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
AD1A
ALI02
ALI03
DET27
INT32
SEL03
SEL21
VAR07
ROBBERY ALARM STATION,INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
GLASS BREAK DETECTOR.
INTRUSION SWITCH/DETECTOR WITH RELAY 1000W.
3-PILOTS LIGHTS.
INDOOR SIREN.
KIT: BURGLAR ALARM CENTRAL + INFRARED ELE.
+ BATTERY.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
AD1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
10
3
AD1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
4
AD3A
ALI02
ALI03
ALA02
DET06
DET21
FIRE ALARM STATION, INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
FIRE ALARM STATION (WITH BATTERY).
SMOKE DETECTOR FOR DOMESTIC CONTROL.
FIRE DETECTOR THROUGH IONIZATION FOR
CENTRAL.
INDOOR SIREN.
1
1
1
1
1
1
SEL21
1
5
AD3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION
10
6
AD3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
AD5
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS,
INCLUDED
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AUTOMATIC OF STAIRS
SWITCH + COMMUTATOR GROUP + BELL PUSHBUTTON.
2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W.
2 LOW CONSUMPTION FLUORESCENT LAMPS.
1
ALI02
CTI10
INT21
LAM08
LAM13
1
1
1
2
2
8
AD5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS
10
9
AD5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
AD33
ALI02
COM14
ENC09
INSTALLATIONS FAULTS SIMULATOR,INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
2 COMMUTATORS.
2-POLE EUROPEAN SOCKET WITH SAFETY DEVICE.
1
1
2
2
10
Ref: 0413-410/10S
ITEM
2 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
10
COM21
LAM08
LAM09
MED65
FUS04
INVERTER + GROUP OF 2 COMMUTATORS.
2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W.
FLUORESCENT LAMP.
DIGITAL MULTIMETER.
3 FUSE-HOLDERS 10 A, 230 VAC (INCLUDE
2,4,6,10 A).
2
2
1
1
1
11
AD33/SOF*
SOFTWARE DE ENSEÑANZA ASISTIDO DESDE
COMPUTADOR (PC) SIMULADOR DE FALLOS EN
INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
10
12
AD33/CAL
SOFWARE DE APRENDIZAJE ASISTIDO DESDE
COMPUTADOR PARA CIRCUITOS C.C. (CÁLCULO Y
ANÁLISIS DE RESULTADOS) POR SIMULADOR DE
FALLOS EN INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
10
13
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
14
MUAD
1
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
15
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
16
0410PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
17
0410PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
18
0410IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
19
0410CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
20
0410TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
21
0410MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0413-410/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
ENERGY: ADVANCED POWER PLANT SIMULATOR. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 0520
1 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
APS12
ADVANCED ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM AND POWER
PLANTS SIMULATOR(GENERATION,
TRANSFORMATION, TRANSPORT, DISTRIBUTION AND
CONSUMPTION), FORMED BY:
1
1
H1
HUB I - ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM WITH PROPER
SCADA I.
1
2
G1
GENERATOR I WITH COMPLETE CABINET,
INCLUDING AVR (AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE
REGULATOR), WITH SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM
1
3
T-G1
T-GR1
GENERATOR GROUP TRANSFORMER I.
GRID TRANSFORMER, WITHOUT VOLTAGE
REGULATION.
1
1
4
LTS1
LINE I AND II CABINET WITH TRANSMISSION
SUBSTATION.
1
5
T-D1
DSL1
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER I.
DISTRIBUTION SUBSTATION I, LOADS AND
NETWORK EQUIVALENTS I.
1
1
6
0520PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
7
0520PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
8
0520IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
9
0520CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
10
0520TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
11
0520MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0520
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.2- Energy Power Plants
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included)
PSS12: Complete Configuration (14 Units).
1AG1. Generator Unit
3AT3.
Power
Transformer
4AL4.
Substation and
Lines Cubicle
5AC5.
Loads and Network
Equivalents Cubicle
8BCE1.
Electric Control Desk
6BEN1.
Electric Control Board 1
(Energy Generation)
7BEL1.
Electric Control Board 2
(Transformation and Lines)
5.- Energy
Basic Configuration = Mini PSS12. Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption (7 Units).
2AG2.
Generator and Auxiliary
Services Cubicle
9BPR2.
Electric Control Board 3
(Spare)
11CEP1.
Energy Control Desk
with SCADA System
included
10CVW1.Videowall
12DAD1./13DAD2./14DAD3.
Control Boards (slides)
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/energypowerplants/PSS12.pdf
Page 75
www.edibon.com
5.2- Energy Power Plants
(continuation)
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included) (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
SOME PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
General Possibilities
Example for Hydroelectric Power Plant:
Experiments for Simulator Knowledge:
EXPERIMENTS FOR SIMULATOR KNOWLEDGE (ESK)
ESK 1. Simulated Hydroelectric Power Station.
1) Specific study of Simulator behaviour.
1.1. General description.
1.2. Layout.
! The selection of one type of Power Plant or another one will make the
1.3.
Main wiring diagram.
system to behave according to a specific simulation.
1.4.
One-line electrical schema.
! The Simulator carries out a complex mathematical modelling that will
1.5. Mosaic type structure diagrams.
allow studying the real behaviour of the Power Plant during the primary
1.6. Unit Steady States (USS).
energy conversion.
1.7. Procedures for Unit Starting (PUS) and Shut Down (PUD).
! All Power Plant parameters can be edited allowing to modify and
1.8. Electrical and Hydraulics conditions for USS ,PUS and PUD.
1.9. Operation modes.
adequate to specific Power Plants cases. For example, in the Hydroelectric
ESK 2-6. Overall presentation of simulation models:
type: rain amount, affluents, pipes, bumpy textures, etc.
ESK 2. Model of the Energy Conversion in a Hydroelectric Power Station.
ESK 3. Model of Generation Unit and Auxiliary Services.
2) Power Plant Control. All procedures.
ESK 4. Model of Main Transformer, Substation and Interconnection Lines.
! Each different starting, operation and stop procedures belongs to each
ESK 5. Model of Loads and Network Equivalent.
specific Power Plant.
ESK 6. Model of Control Room.
! During the process there will appear some images of real Power Plants ESK 7-22. Operation instructions for the different parts of the Equipment:
ESK 7. Operations from Hydraulic Control Boards.
while an animated simulation will show how our Power Plant works.
ESK 8-10. Operations from Hydraulic Control Desk:
! It shows the real procedures that happens in a real Power Plant.
ESK 8. Software operations on Hydraulic Control Desk:
-Circuit Breaker Faults
3) Possibility to use different types of Power Plants at the same time.
-Alarms
! Apart from the particular study of each type of Power Plant and the
-……….
ESK 9. Operation of Generator Excitation System from Hydraulic Control Desk.
operation (generation) synchronized with the national electrical network,
ESK
10.
Operation
of Power Electronic Converter from Hydraulic Control Desk.
the simulator allows an interconnection between different types of Power
ESK 11-12. Operations from Electric Control Boards:
Plants. This will allow a real Network Simulation, studying the figure of
ESK 11. Operations of the protective relays.
system operator and regulating the combined operation of the different
ESK 12. Other operations on the Electric Control Boards.
Power Plants types.
ESK 13-14. Operations from Electric Control Desk:
ESK 13. Control and signalling of switchgear, taking into account interlockings.
ESK 14. Generator frequency and voltage adjustments.
Main Target
ESK 15. Generator Unit.
ESK 16-17. Operations on Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle:
! The main target of this Simulator is to train technical students, workers and
ESK 16. Measurements of generator and auxiliary services quantities.
even teachers, in how the Energy can be generated, transformed, transported,
ESK 17.Location and type of fault selection for Synchronous generator protection
distributed and how it can be consumed.
system.
! Additionally PSS12 allows to simulate all the procedures carried out in real
ESK 18. Power transformer.
power plant to star up the generation plant, to run it and to connect it to the
ESK 19-20. Operations on Substation and Lines Cubicle
National grid (Electrical Network), etc.
ESK 19. Adjustment of lines 1 and 2 lengths.
ESK 20. Location and fault type selection on lines 1 and 2.
ESK 21-22. Operations from Loads and Network Equivalents Cubicle
ESK 21. Type and level of load selection.
Structure of the Complete Simulator
ESK 22. Network equivalents selection.
ESK 23. Videowall.
The Complete Simulator is formed by two main parts, the first part (a) with 14
Experiments for Operational Simulation:
Units and the second one (b) the Simulation with Generation System Software Unit starting and shutdown procedures (EOS 1-17)
EOS 1-14. Starting procedures.
(Hybrid System).
Starting unit to running in island- PUS 12
EOS 1. Manual starting.
a) Small Scale Electric Power System:
EOS 2. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
This Small Scale Electric Power System consists of 14 different units (1AG1
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1- PUS 13.
Generator Unit, 2AG2 Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle, 3AT3
EOS 3. Manual starting.
Power Transformer, 4AL4 Substation and Lines Cubicle, 5AC5 Loads and
EOS 4. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.2
Network Equivalents Cubicle, 6BEN1 Electric Control Board 1 (energy
EOS 5. Manual starting.
generation), 7BEL1 Electric Control Board 2 (transformation and lines),
EOS 6. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
8BCE1 Electric Control Board 3 (spare), 9BPR2 Electric Control Desk,
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.3
10CVW1 Videowall, 11CEP1 Energy Control Desk, 12DAD1-13DAD2EOS 7. Manual starting.
14DAD3 Control Boards (slides)).
EOS 8. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 1- PUS 14.1
This Complete Simulator is built with the same devices as those used in the
EOS 9. Manual starting.
EOS 10. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
real Power Plants. Therefore the system reproduces at small scale the
Starting
unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 2- PUS 14.2
functioning of a real Power System.
EOS 11. Manual starting.
EOS 12. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Not only the steps for starting a Power Plant, but many faults can be
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Lines 1 and 2- PUS 14.3
simulated.
EOS 13. Manual starting.
EOS 14. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
EOS 15-17. Shutdown procedures
b) Software Packages:
Normal shutdown PUD-N
8 Software Packages, which allow to simulate 8 different Electric Power
EOS 15. Manual shutdown.
Plants, as follow:
EOS 16. Guide-operator and automatic shutdown.
! Nuclear Power Station (ref. CN).
Emergency shutdown PUD-E
! Diesel Thermal Station (ref. CTD).
EOS 17. Emergency shutdown
! Fossil Fuel Thermal Station (ref. CTCF).
Unit operating in normal regime (EOS 18- 58)
EOS 18-29. Unit feeding isolated loads with automatic frequency control and voltage
! Combined Cycle Thermal Station (ref. CTCC).
adjustment at remote substation busbars.
! Hydroelectric Station (ref. CHD).
Through Line 1 (USS 4.1)
! Wind-powered Station (ref. CE).
EOS 18. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure resistive loads.
! Photovoltaic Solar Station (ref. CSFV).
EOS 19. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure inductive loads.
! Heliothermic Solar Station (ref. CHST).
EOS 20. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure capacitive loads.
EOS 21. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different mixed loads.
Through
Line 2 (USS 4.2)
H and anyone requested by the customer.
EOS 22. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure resistive loads.
EOS 23. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure inductive loads.
This is an Hybrid System as combines hardware and software using the proper
EOS 24. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure capacitive loads.
mathematics models.
EOS 25. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different mixed loads.
Through Lines 1 and 2 (USS 4.3)
The final configuration of the Complete Simulator will be formed by:
EOS 26.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure resistive
1) One small scale Electric Power System.
loads.
2) At least, one of the eight Software Packages mentioned above. The
EOS 27.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure inductive
customer will decide which (any or all of them) of the software packages
loads.
wants to buy.
EOS 28. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure capacitive
loads.
EOS 29. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different mixed loads.
c) SCADA System. This unit uses a control and acquisition system (SCADA)
EOS
30-33.
Unit
feeding isolated loads through Line 2 (USS 4.2) with automatic frequency
in both versions MINI PSS12 and PSS12.
control and voltage adjustment at substation bars.
EOS 30. Determine voltage drop through main transformer with different pure resistive
loads.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
...Etc. (See PSS12 catalogue)
units/energy/energypowerplants/PSS12.pdf
5.- Energy
Differences between Simulators of the different Power Plants:
Page 76
issue:01/11
ENERGY: ADVANCED POWER PLANT SIMULATOR .MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 0521
1 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
G2
GENERATOR II WITH COMPLETE CABINET,
INCLUDING AVR (AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE
REGULATOR), WITH SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM.
1
2
T-G2
T-GR2
GENERATOR GROUP TRANSFORMER II.
GRID TRANSFORMER WITH TAP CHANGER, WITH
VOLTAGE REGULATION.
1
1
3
LTS2
LINE III, IV AND V CABINET WITH
TRANSMISSION SUBSTATION.
1
4
DSL2
1
T-D2
DISTRIBUTION SUBSTATION II, LOADS AND
NETWORK EQUIVALENTS II.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER II
1
5
C-DL
DYNAMICS LOADS.
1
6
C-A
ALARMS CABINET
1
7
C-P
METHACRILATE STUDENT PROTECTIONS FOR SAFETY
MEASUREMENTS.
1
8
C-F
SPECIFIC POWER PLANT FILMS WITH 3 SCREENS
AND PROJECTOR.
1
9
SCADA-CRI
30 STUDENTS VISUALIZATION AND REMOTE
CONTROL INDIVIDUALLY
1
10
0521PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
11
0521PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
12
0521IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
13
0521CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
14
0521TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
15
0521MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0521
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.2- Energy Power Plants
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included)
PSS12: Complete Configuration (14 Units).
1AG1. Generator Unit
3AT3.
Power
Transformer
4AL4.
Substation and
Lines Cubicle
5AC5.
Loads and Network
Equivalents Cubicle
8BCE1.
Electric Control Desk
6BEN1.
Electric Control Board 1
(Energy Generation)
7BEL1.
Electric Control Board 2
(Transformation and Lines)
5.- Energy
Basic Configuration = Mini PSS12. Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption (7 Units).
2AG2.
Generator and Auxiliary
Services Cubicle
9BPR2.
Electric Control Board 3
(Spare)
11CEP1.
Energy Control Desk
with SCADA System
included
10CVW1.Videowall
12DAD1./13DAD2./14DAD3.
Control Boards (slides)
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/energypowerplants/PSS12.pdf
Page 75
www.edibon.com
5.2- Energy Power Plants
(continuation)
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included) (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
SOME PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
General Possibilities
Example for Hydroelectric Power Plant:
Experiments for Simulator Knowledge:
EXPERIMENTS FOR SIMULATOR KNOWLEDGE (ESK)
ESK 1. Simulated Hydroelectric Power Station.
1) Specific study of Simulator behaviour.
1.1. General description.
1.2. Layout.
! The selection of one type of Power Plant or another one will make the
1.3.
Main wiring diagram.
system to behave according to a specific simulation.
1.4.
One-line electrical schema.
! The Simulator carries out a complex mathematical modelling that will
1.5. Mosaic type structure diagrams.
allow studying the real behaviour of the Power Plant during the primary
1.6. Unit Steady States (USS).
energy conversion.
1.7. Procedures for Unit Starting (PUS) and Shut Down (PUD).
! All Power Plant parameters can be edited allowing to modify and
1.8. Electrical and Hydraulics conditions for USS ,PUS and PUD.
1.9. Operation modes.
adequate to specific Power Plants cases. For example, in the Hydroelectric
ESK 2-6. Overall presentation of simulation models:
type: rain amount, affluents, pipes, bumpy textures, etc.
ESK 2. Model of the Energy Conversion in a Hydroelectric Power Station.
ESK 3. Model of Generation Unit and Auxiliary Services.
2) Power Plant Control. All procedures.
ESK 4. Model of Main Transformer, Substation and Interconnection Lines.
! Each different starting, operation and stop procedures belongs to each
ESK 5. Model of Loads and Network Equivalent.
specific Power Plant.
ESK 6. Model of Control Room.
! During the process there will appear some images of real Power Plants ESK 7-22. Operation instructions for the different parts of the Equipment:
ESK 7. Operations from Hydraulic Control Boards.
while an animated simulation will show how our Power Plant works.
ESK 8-10. Operations from Hydraulic Control Desk:
! It shows the real procedures that happens in a real Power Plant.
ESK 8. Software operations on Hydraulic Control Desk:
-Circuit Breaker Faults
3) Possibility to use different types of Power Plants at the same time.
-Alarms
! Apart from the particular study of each type of Power Plant and the
-……….
ESK 9. Operation of Generator Excitation System from Hydraulic Control Desk.
operation (generation) synchronized with the national electrical network,
ESK
10.
Operation
of Power Electronic Converter from Hydraulic Control Desk.
the simulator allows an interconnection between different types of Power
ESK 11-12. Operations from Electric Control Boards:
Plants. This will allow a real Network Simulation, studying the figure of
ESK 11. Operations of the protective relays.
system operator and regulating the combined operation of the different
ESK 12. Other operations on the Electric Control Boards.
Power Plants types.
ESK 13-14. Operations from Electric Control Desk:
ESK 13. Control and signalling of switchgear, taking into account interlockings.
ESK 14. Generator frequency and voltage adjustments.
Main Target
ESK 15. Generator Unit.
ESK 16-17. Operations on Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle:
! The main target of this Simulator is to train technical students, workers and
ESK 16. Measurements of generator and auxiliary services quantities.
even teachers, in how the Energy can be generated, transformed, transported,
ESK 17.Location and type of fault selection for Synchronous generator protection
distributed and how it can be consumed.
system.
! Additionally PSS12 allows to simulate all the procedures carried out in real
ESK 18. Power transformer.
power plant to star up the generation plant, to run it and to connect it to the
ESK 19-20. Operations on Substation and Lines Cubicle
National grid (Electrical Network), etc.
ESK 19. Adjustment of lines 1 and 2 lengths.
ESK 20. Location and fault type selection on lines 1 and 2.
ESK 21-22. Operations from Loads and Network Equivalents Cubicle
ESK 21. Type and level of load selection.
Structure of the Complete Simulator
ESK 22. Network equivalents selection.
ESK 23. Videowall.
The Complete Simulator is formed by two main parts, the first part (a) with 14
Experiments for Operational Simulation:
Units and the second one (b) the Simulation with Generation System Software Unit starting and shutdown procedures (EOS 1-17)
EOS 1-14. Starting procedures.
(Hybrid System).
Starting unit to running in island- PUS 12
EOS 1. Manual starting.
a) Small Scale Electric Power System:
EOS 2. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
This Small Scale Electric Power System consists of 14 different units (1AG1
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1- PUS 13.
Generator Unit, 2AG2 Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle, 3AT3
EOS 3. Manual starting.
Power Transformer, 4AL4 Substation and Lines Cubicle, 5AC5 Loads and
EOS 4. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.2
Network Equivalents Cubicle, 6BEN1 Electric Control Board 1 (energy
EOS 5. Manual starting.
generation), 7BEL1 Electric Control Board 2 (transformation and lines),
EOS 6. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
8BCE1 Electric Control Board 3 (spare), 9BPR2 Electric Control Desk,
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.3
10CVW1 Videowall, 11CEP1 Energy Control Desk, 12DAD1-13DAD2EOS 7. Manual starting.
14DAD3 Control Boards (slides)).
EOS 8. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 1- PUS 14.1
This Complete Simulator is built with the same devices as those used in the
EOS 9. Manual starting.
EOS 10. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
real Power Plants. Therefore the system reproduces at small scale the
Starting
unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 2- PUS 14.2
functioning of a real Power System.
EOS 11. Manual starting.
EOS 12. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Not only the steps for starting a Power Plant, but many faults can be
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Lines 1 and 2- PUS 14.3
simulated.
EOS 13. Manual starting.
EOS 14. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
EOS 15-17. Shutdown procedures
b) Software Packages:
Normal shutdown PUD-N
8 Software Packages, which allow to simulate 8 different Electric Power
EOS 15. Manual shutdown.
Plants, as follow:
EOS 16. Guide-operator and automatic shutdown.
! Nuclear Power Station (ref. CN).
Emergency shutdown PUD-E
! Diesel Thermal Station (ref. CTD).
EOS 17. Emergency shutdown
! Fossil Fuel Thermal Station (ref. CTCF).
Unit operating in normal regime (EOS 18- 58)
EOS 18-29. Unit feeding isolated loads with automatic frequency control and voltage
! Combined Cycle Thermal Station (ref. CTCC).
adjustment at remote substation busbars.
! Hydroelectric Station (ref. CHD).
Through Line 1 (USS 4.1)
! Wind-powered Station (ref. CE).
EOS 18. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure resistive loads.
! Photovoltaic Solar Station (ref. CSFV).
EOS 19. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure inductive loads.
! Heliothermic Solar Station (ref. CHST).
EOS 20. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure capacitive loads.
EOS 21. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different mixed loads.
Through
Line 2 (USS 4.2)
H and anyone requested by the customer.
EOS 22. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure resistive loads.
EOS 23. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure inductive loads.
This is an Hybrid System as combines hardware and software using the proper
EOS 24. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure capacitive loads.
mathematics models.
EOS 25. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different mixed loads.
Through Lines 1 and 2 (USS 4.3)
The final configuration of the Complete Simulator will be formed by:
EOS 26.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure resistive
1) One small scale Electric Power System.
loads.
2) At least, one of the eight Software Packages mentioned above. The
EOS 27.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure inductive
customer will decide which (any or all of them) of the software packages
loads.
wants to buy.
EOS 28. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure capacitive
loads.
EOS 29. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different mixed loads.
c) SCADA System. This unit uses a control and acquisition system (SCADA)
EOS
30-33.
Unit
feeding isolated loads through Line 2 (USS 4.2) with automatic frequency
in both versions MINI PSS12 and PSS12.
control and voltage adjustment at substation bars.
EOS 30. Determine voltage drop through main transformer with different pure resistive
loads.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
...Etc. (See PSS12 catalogue)
units/energy/energypowerplants/PSS12.pdf
5.- Energy
Differences between Simulators of the different Power Plants:
Page 76
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY FLUID MECHANICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0813-810/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIFLUBA
BASIC FLUIDS MECHANICS INTEGRATED
LABORATORY. FORMED BY:
1
1
FME00B
BASIC HYDRAULIC FEED SYSTEM
1
2
FME 03
BERNOULLI'S THEOREM
1
3
FME03/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BERNOULLI'S THEOREM
10
4
FME03/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
BERNOULLI´S THEOREM (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
5
FME 05
ENERGY LOSS IN BENDS
1
6
FME05/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ENERGY LOSS IN BENDS
10
7
FME05/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR ENERGY
LOSS IN BENDS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
8
FME 08
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
1
9
FME08/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
10
10
FME08/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
11
FME 13
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CHARACTERISTIC
1
12
FME13/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CHARACTERISITCS
10
13
FME13/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CHARACTERISTICS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
14
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
15
BDAS
BASIC DATA ADQUISITION SYSTEM AND SENSORS
FOR BEING USED WITH FME EDIBON SERIE,
FORMED BY:
ELECTRONIC BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
SPECIFIC SOFTWARE AND SENSORS FOR EACH FME
UNIT
1
IB
DAB
BDAS/SOF
1
1
4
16
0810PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
17
0810PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
18
0810IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
19
0810CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
20
0810TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
21
0810MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0813-810/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
Modules
1
Base Service Units
2
FME00
Modules
(FME17)
(FME03)
(FME01)
(FME08)
(FME07)
(FME21)
or
FME00/B
(FME15)
(FME09)
(FME18)
(FME04)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME05)
(FME25)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
(FME24)
+
(FME16)
(FME14)
(FME19)
FME../SOF.
Student/Module
Software
(FME13)
(FME10)
4
(FME11)
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(FME27)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME20)
(FME06)
(FME22)
(FME26)
(FME12)
(FME23)
(FME02)
5
Other modules
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition System and
sensors
Other modules
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Base Service Unit +
Module/s is the minimum supply)
Available Modules
-FME01. Impact of a Jet.
-FME12. Series/Parallel Pumps.
-FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
-FME02. Flow over Weirs.
-FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
-FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
-FME14. Free and Forced Vortices.
-FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy ’s
Equation).
-FME04. Orifice Discharge.
-FME15. Water Hammer.
-FME05. Energy Losses in Bends.
-FME16. Pelton Turbine.
-FME06. Osborne-Reynolds’ Demonstration.
-FME17. Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
-FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes.
-FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration.
-FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure.
-FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration.
-FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels.
-FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
-FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator.
-FME21. Radial Flow Turbine.
-FME11. Metacentric Height.
-FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
-FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
-FME26.
Depression Measurement System
(Vacuum gauge).
-FME27. Axial Flow Turbine.
-FME28. Francis Turbine.
-FME29. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Laboratory structure
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Base Service Units
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Every module needs being provided with water in order to run the experiment. There are two options:
FME00. Hydraulics Bench
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Mobile hydraulic bench, made in fibreglass reinforced
polyester, and mounted on wheels for mobility.
Centrifugal pump, 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.1-12.8
m., single phase 220V. / 50Hz or 110V./60Hz.
Runner made in stainless steel.
Sump tank capacity: 165 litres. Small channel: 8 litres.
Flow measurement: volumetric tank, gauged from 0 to 7
litres for low flow values and from 0 to 40 litres for high
flow values.
Control valve for regulating the flow.
Open channel to place the test module.
Measuring cylinder is provided for the measurement of
small flow rates.
Remote hand-operating dump valve in the base of the
volumetric tank.
Rapidity and ease interchanging of the different modules.
Dimensions (approx.): 1130 x 730 x 1000 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME00/B. Basic Hydraulic Feed System
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The FME00/B is a service unit for different Fluid
Mechanics Area units.
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single-phase 220V. / 50Hz. or 110V. / 60Hz.
Stainless steel impeller.
Tank capacity:140 litres approx.
Flowmeter. Membrane type flow adjusting valve.
Pump breaker starting. Safety differential switch.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 600 x 700 mm.
Weight: 40Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
2
Modules
Every module is a set of components that allows the realization of several experiments on Hydraulics. EDIBON offers 29 different models covering the most important topics
in the learning of Fluid Mechanics. Every Fluid Mechanics Module has its own manuals (8 manuals are normally supplied), that gives the theoretical background and
explains everything the student need to carry out the exercises/experiments.
Connectors, pipes and cables for completing the exercises and practices are supplied.
FME01. Impac of a jet
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Jet diameter: 8 mm.
Impact surfaces diameter: 40 mm.
Impact surfaces:
180° hemispherical surface.
120° curve surface.
90° flat surface.
A set of masses of 5, 10, 50 and 100 g. is supplied.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 250 x 250 x 500 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Impact against a flat surface.
Impact against a curve surface of 120º.
Impact against a hemispherical surface.
Use of the fast connectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME02. Flow over Weirs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Dimensions of the weirs: 160x230x40mm.
Neckline angle in the V-shape weir: 90º.
Dimension of rectangular notch: 30x82mm.
Scale of the level meter: 0 to 160 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 16 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a
rectangular neckline, made on a thin wall.
2.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a Vshape neckline, made on a thin wall.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Number of manometer tubes: 8
Upstream diameter of the throat: 25 mm.
Narrowing:
Downstream: 21°.
Upstream: 10°.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800 x450 x 700 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s Theorem. Divergentconvergent position.
3.- Determination of Bernoulli’s Theorem equation.
Convergent-divergent position.
4.- Observation of differences between convergent and
divergent position.
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Transparent cylindrical tank.
Five type of mouthpieces: diaphragm, colloidal, 2 of
Venturi and cylindrical.
Height of maximum load: 400 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 450 x 900 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME05. Energy Losses in Bends
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Range of the two type Bourdon manometers: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Differential manometers range: 0 to 500 mm.
Number of manometric tubes: 12.
PVC Rigid pipes:
Internal dia.: 25 mm., external dia.:32 mm.
Flexible pipes:
Pressure taking-differential Manometer. External
dia.: 10 mm.
Pressurizing equipment. External diameter: 6 mm.
Drain. External diameter: 25 mm.
Fittings:
45º angle, 90º curve, 90º medium elbow, 90º
short elbow, 90º long elbow, broadening of
25/40, narrowing of 40/25.
Membrane valves, diameter 25 mm. Antireturn 6 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x550x950 mm. Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
2.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
3.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
4.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
5.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
6.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
7.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
8.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
9.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
10.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
11.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
12.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
13.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Venturi type.
14.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
15.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Measurement of the flow.
3.- Measurement of load losses for a short elbow of 90º.
4.- Measurement of load losses for a middle elbow of 90º.
5.- Measurement of load losses for a curve of 90º.
6.- Measurement of load losses for a broadening of 25/40.
7.- Measurement of load losses for a narrowing 40/25.
8.- Measurement of load losses for an angle of 45º.
9.- Measurement of load losses for a membrane valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME06. Osborne- Reynolds Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tube inner diameter: 10 mm.
Tube outer diameter: 13 mm.
Visualization pipe length: 700 mm.
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Tank capacity: 10 litres.
Flow control valve: diaphragm type.
The coloured fluid is regulated with a needle valve.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1250x450x450mm.Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Observation of the laminar, transition and turbulent
regime.
2.- Study of the velocity profile, reproducing the OsborneReynolds’s experiment.
3.- Reynolds’s number calculation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Test pipe of 4 mm. of inner diameter, 6 mm. of external
diameter and 500 mm. of length.
1 differential manometer of water column.
Manometer scale: 0 to 500 mm (water).
2 Bourdon type manometers, range: 0 to 2 bar.
Tank of constant height.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 330 x 330 x 900 mm.
Weight: 30Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 7
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Energy loss in pipes for a turbulent regimen.
2.- Determination of the energy loss in a turbulent regimen.
3.- Determination of the number of Reynolds for a turbulent
regimen.
4.- Energy loss in pipes for a laminar regimen.
5.- Determination of the energy loss factor f for a pipe in
laminar regimen.
6.- Determination of Reynolds number for the laminar regimen.
7.- Determination of the kinematic viscosity of water.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME04. Orifice Discharge
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank capacity: 5.5 l.
Distance between suspended masses and the support
point: 285 mm.
Area of the section: 0.007 m².
Total depth of submerged quadrant: 160 mm.
Height of support point on the quadrant: 100 mm.
A set of masses of different weights is supplied (4 of 100
gr., 1 of 50 gr., 5 of 10 gr. and 1 of 5 gr.).
Dimensions (approx.): 550 x 250 x 350 mm. Weight:5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of channel approx.: 15/630 mm. Depth of
channel approx.: 150 mm.
Damping tank.
Hydrodynamic models: 2 lengthened, 2 circular of 25
and 50 mm. dia., rectangle with rounded edges, wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 900 x 450 x 500 mm.
Weight: 7Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90°, partially submerged.
2.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°,
partially submerged.
3.- Determination of the center of pressures, angle <> 90°
partially submerged.
4.- Determination of the equivalent force with an angle
<>90° partially submerged.
5.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90° totally submerged.
6.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°
totally submerged.
7.- Determination of the center of pressures, <>90° totally
submerged.
8.- Determination of the resultant force, angle <>90° totally
submerged.
9.- Balance of momentum.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Leakage of liquids by thin-wall weirs.
2.- Liquid leakage by thick-wall weirs.
3.- Models with wing profile submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
4.- Circular models submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
5.- Demonstration of the phenomenon associated to the flow
in open channels.
6.- Visualization of the flow lines around different submerged
hydrodynamic models.
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Pressure manometer: Bourdon type. 0 - 2.5 bar.
Masses (approx. weights): 0.5 kg. 1.0 kg. 2.5 kg. 5 kg.
Piston diameter: 18 mm. Piston weight: 0.5 kg.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 4Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Bourdon type manometer calibration.
2.- Hysteresis curve determination.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME11. Metacentric Height
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Maximum angle: +/- 13°.
Corresponding lineal dimension: +/- 90 mm.
Dimension of the float:
Length: 353 mm. Width: 204 mm. Total height:475 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Angular
displacements.
2.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Different positions of
the center of gravity.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME 12. Series/Parallel Pumps
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single- phase, 220V./50Hz or 110V./60 Hz.
Absolute pressure manometer at the pump admission,
range - 1 to 3 bar.
2 manometers placed one of them in the discharge and
the another one in the discharge accessory, range: 0 - 4
bar. Membrane valve for flow regulating. Two way valve:
2 positions: open or close.
Accessories: two flexible pipes with quick connections,
reinforced pipe with quick connections. Discharge
accessory.Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions of FME12(approx.): 500x400x400 mm.
approx.
Dimensions of discharge accessory: 500 x400 x250mm.
approx.
Weight: 30Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-H(Q) curve obtaining of a centrifugal pump.
2.-Series coupling of two pumps with the same characteristics.
3.-Parallel coupling of two pumps with the same
characteristics.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m. Speed variator.
Discharge accessory.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 500 x1250 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 8
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Obtaining of the curves H(Q), N(Q), Eff%(Q) of a
centrifugal pump.
2.- Making of the map of a centrifugal pump.
3.- Representation of the adimensional curves H*, N* and
rpm*.
4.- Series coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
5.- Series coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
6.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
7.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME14. Free and Forced Vortices
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank diameter: 300 mm.
Tank height: 300 mm.
Mouthpieces orifice diameters: 8, 16 and 24 mm.
Distance between centers: 0, 30, 50, 70, 90 and 110mm.
Pitot tube with measuring points at: 15, 20, 25 and 30mm
radius and a scale.
Measurement bridge.
Inlet pipes: 9 and 12.5 mm. diameter.
Diameter measurement system by Nonius.
Blind mouthpiece with X-shaped crosses.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of forced vortex without discharge orifice.
2.- Study of forced vortex with discharge orifice.
3.- Study of the free vortex.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME15. Water Hammer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Constant level deposit, in methacrylate.
Unload deposit, in methacrylate.
Pipe circuits in PVC.
Valves to select the circuit.
2 adjustable equilibrium chimneys and subjection clips.
Connections to the Hydraulics Bench (FME00) or Basic
Hydraulic Feed System (FME00/B) with fast plugs.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx).:1215x270x1430mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Subduing of the water hammer effects.
2.- Study of the subduing in function of the diameter of the
chimney.
3.- Calculations of the energy losses in pipes.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME16. Pelton Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Speed range: 0 - 2000 r.p.m. Torque: 10 W.
Manometer range: 0 - 2.5 bar.
Number of buckets: 16.
Drum radius: 30 mm.
Dynamometers range: 0 - 20 N.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.):750x400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Pelton’s
Turbine.
2.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
3.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
4.- Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME17. Orifice & Free Jet Flow
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Orifices with diameters of 3.5 and 6 mm.
Jet trajectory Probes: 8.
Maximum height: 500 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the orifice velocity coefficient.
2.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in permanent
regime.
3.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in variable
regime.
4.- Obtaining of the tank discharge time.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 500 mm of water column.
Number of manometric tubes: 8
Orifice plate diameter: 25 mm.
Flowmeter: 2 to 30 l/min.
Venturi dimensions:
Throat diameter: 20 mm. Upstream pipe diameter:
32 mm. Downstream taper: 21°.
Upstream taper: 14°.
Orifice Plate dimensions:
Upstream pipe diameter: 35 mm.
Downstream orifice diameter: 19 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 450 x 950 mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 9
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
Venturi.
3.- Determination of the Cd factor in the Venturi.
4.- Determination of the strangulation in the Venturi.
5.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
orifice plate.
6.- Determination of the Cd factor in the orifice plate.
7.- Determination of the effective area in an orifice plate.
8.- Comparison of the energy loss in the three different
elements.
9.- Comparison among the Venturi, orifice plate and
flowmeter.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Vacuum gauge range: from-1 to 0 bar.
Throat section: 36 mm².
Normal section: 150 mm².
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm. Weight:5Kg.
1.- Study of cavitation.
2.- Visualization of the cavitation phenomenon with forced
conduction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of the table: 400/210 mm.
Depth of the table: adjustable depending on the models.
Hydrodynamic models:
Two circular ones of 25 and 50 mm. diameter.
Two rectangular ones of 25x25 and 50x50 mm.
Wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 870x450 x 400 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ideal flow around a submerged cylinder.
Ideal flow around a submerged profile.
Ideal flow around a body in peak.
Ideal flow in a convergent channel.
Ideal flow in a divergent channel.
Ideal flow in an elbow of 90º.
Ideal flow in a sudden contraction.
Ideal flow in a sudden broadening.
Substitution of a line of current for a solid edge.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME21. Radial Flow Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzles:
inlet diameter: 21 mm., outlet diameter: 2.0 mm.,
discharge angle: 180º.
Turbine rotor:
external diameter:69 mm., internal diameter:40 mm.,
number of nozzles: 2., inlet angle to the nozzle: 180º.,
outlet angle to the nozzle: 180.º, used material:
aluminium.
Brake:
pulley diameter:60 mm., Effective diameter: 50 mm.
Water pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase 220 V.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x 800 mm.
Weight: 50Kg.
1.2.3.4.-
Flow calculation.
Obtaining of the M (n, Ha ), N(n, Ha ), h (n, Ha ) curves.
Obtaining of the M (n, Q), Nm(n, Q), h (n, Q) curves.
Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer (type Bourdon), range: 0-2.5 bar.
Manometer(type Bourdon), range: 0-(-1) bar.
2 tanks, height: 135 mm and internal diameter: 64 mm.
Venturi tube with 6 tappings (Divergent/Convergent).
Differential manometers: 0-500mm.
5 manometric tubes.
Quick connection system incorporated.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x400x850 mm. Weight:10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to fill the manometric tubes.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
Bernoulli’s theorem study.
4.- Cavitation study.
5.- Pressure reduction in a tank.
6.- Aspiration pump.
7.- Aspiration pump for mixing two liquids.
8.- Using for air and water mixing.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminum structure where the pipe network is
located and the subjection panel of the manometers.
Pipe network. This pipe network has been mounted with 4
pipes, each one with a valve to let the flow of water run
through the corresponding pipe.
Test pipes: two 20mm wide PVC pipes, one 16mm wide
PVC pipe and one 10mm wide methacrylate pipe.
8 eight pressure intakes, connected to a manometric
tubes panel of pressurized water.
The pressurization in made by a manual pump.
Manometric tubes panel: number of manometric tubes:
8, range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Inlet pipe. Outlet pipe. Regulation valve for controlling
the flow through the network.
Adjustable legs for leveling the unit.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x350x800mm. Weight: 50Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 10
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- Load loss in a PVC pipe .
2.- Load loss in a methacrylate pipe.
.
3.- Study of the load loss in pipes made of the same material.
4.- Study of the load loss in function of the material.
5.- Friction coefficient in a PVC pipe.
6.- Friction coefficient in a methacrylate pipe.
7.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the material.
8.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the diameter.
9.- Configuration of network in parallel for pipes of the
same material and different diameter.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0-300 mm. water.
Number of manometric tubes: 8.
Strangulation diameter upstream: 25 mm.
Narrowing: upstream: 10º, downstream: 21º.
Venturi’s tube with Pitot tube.
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 1.0
to 1.5 mm (FME24/A).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 2.5
to 3.5 mm (FME24/B).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 5.5
to 7.0 mm (FME24/C).
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x450x700 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
divergent - convergent position.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
convergent-divergent position.
3.- Direct measurement of the static height and total
distribution of heights in Venturi’s tubes.
4.- Determination of the exact section in a Venturi’s tube.
5.- Head losses in the porous bed (elements FME24/A,
FME24/B and FME24/C).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Channel of rectangular section with transparent walls in
methacrylate, section: 80 mm., length: 1 m.
Rigid and flexible pipes. Regulating valves.
Storage tank. Tank with soothing of flow.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1500x500x500mm.Weight:40 Kg
Available accessories:
FME25TP. Pitot tube.
FME25CV. Vertical plane gate.
FME25SDL. Syphon.
FME25RMC.Markings for measurement of the water
height.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- To study and demonstrate the properties of fluids in open
channels.
2.- Measurement of water height and velocity along the
channel.
3.- Flow control by floodgates.
4.- Level control using syphons.
5.- Calculation of water flow.
Other possible practices:
6.- Filling of the Pitot tube.
7.- Use of markings for measuring the water height.
FME26. Depression Measurement System (vacuum gauge).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure.
Pressure-vacuum gauge adjusted from -1 to 0 bar.
Quick connections.
Dimensions (approx.): 220 x110 x 42 0 mm. Weight: 2Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME27. Axial Flow Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzle:
inlet dia. of the throat: 2.5 mm., outlet dia. of the
throat: 2.5 mm., discharge angle: 20º and 30º.
Turbine Rotor:
external dia.:53 mm., internal dia.: 45 mm., number
of blades: 40, inlet angle of the blades: 40º, outlet
angle of the blades: 40º, used material: brass.
Brake:
pulley diameter: 60 mm., real diameter: 50 mm.
Water Pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase,220 V.
Bourdon type manometer.
8 ball valves.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x800 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-To measure the depression caused for the fluid aspiration by
an hydraulic pump.
2.-We can observe the different negative readings due to the
different methods of fluid aspiration for its subsequent
impulsion.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Flow calculation.
2.- Determination of the discharge coefficient of the nozzle.
3.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n),
(20º nozzle).
4.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n);
(30º nozzle).
5.- A dimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME28. Francis Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Francis turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output aprox.: 2.8W.
Impeller: external diameter 50mm,width of vanes 5mm, 7
vanes.
Guide vanes: 6 off, adjustable.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the typical turbine curves.
2.- Turbine power output versus speed and flow rate at
various heads.
3.- Effect of guide vane setting on turbine performance.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME29. Kaplan Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Kaplan Turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output approx. 5 W.
Six adjustable guide vanes.
Guide rotary blades.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Kaplan
Turbine.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
4.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
5.- Adimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (FME../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment with is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
FME../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory
has been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the lab exercises and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
- FME01/SOF. Impact of a Jet.
- FME02/SOF. Flow over Weirs.
- FME03/SOF. Bernoulli’s Theorem
Demonstration.
- FME04/SOF. Orifice Discharge.
- FME05/SOF. Energy Losses in Bends.
- FME06/SOF. Osborne-Reynolds
Demonstration.
- FME07/SOF. Energy Losses in Pipes.
- FME08/SOF. Hydrostatic Pressure.
- FME09/SOF. Flow Visualization in Channels.
- FME10/SOF. Dead Weight Calibrator.
- FME11/SOF. Metacentric Height.
- FME12/SOF.
- FME13/SOF.
- FME14/SOF.
- FME15/SOF.
- FME16/SOF.
- FME17/SOF.
- FME18/SOF.
- FME19/SOF.
- FME20/SOF.
- FME21/SOF.
- FME22/SOF.
- FME23/SOF.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
Laminar Flow Demonstration.
Radial Flow Unit.
Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/SOF. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds in
Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/SOF. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/SOF. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/SOF. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/SOF. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/SOF. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 12
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
4
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basis Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
Available Software Packages:
- FME01/CAL.
- FME02/CAL.
- FME03/CAL.
- FME04/CAL.
- FME05/CAL.
- FME06/CAL.
- FME07/CAL.
- FME08/CAL.
- FME09/CAL.
- FME10/CAL.
- FME11/CAL.
- FME12/CAL.
Impact of a Jet.
Flow over Weirs.
Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
Orifice Discharge.
Energy Losses in Bends.
Osborne-Reynolds Demonstration.
Energy Losses in Pipes.
Hydrostatic Pressure.
Flow Visualization in Channels.
Dead Weight Calibrator.
Metacentric Height.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
- FME13/CAL.
- FME14/CAL.
- FME15/CAL.
- FME16/CAL.
- FME17/CAL.
- FME18/CAL.
- FME19/CAL.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
- FME20/CAL. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
- FME21/CAL. Radial Flow Turbine.
- FME22/CAL. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation
Unit.
5
- FME23/CAL. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/CAL. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/CAL. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/CAL. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/CAL. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/CAL. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/CAL. Kaplan Turbine.
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition Systems and sensors
For being used with modules type ”FME”.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 13
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Software (continuation)
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY FLUID MECHANICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0813-811/10S
ITEM
1 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIFLUBA
BASIC FLUIDS MECHANICS INTEGRATED
LABORATORY. FORMED BY:
1
1
FME 00
HYDRAULICS BENCH
1
2
FME 01
IMPACT OF JET
1
3
FME01/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
IMPACT OF JET
10
4
FME01/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR IMPACT
OF JET V
10
5
FME 06
OSBORNE-REYNOLDS DEMONSTRATION
1
6
FME06/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OSBORNE-REYNOLDS DEMOSTRATION
10
7
FME06/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OSBORNE- REYNOLDS DEMOSTRATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
8
FME 07
ENERGY LOSSES IN PIPES
1
9
FME07/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ENERGY LOSSES
10
10
FME07/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR ENERGY
LOSSES IN PIPES (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
11
FME 09
FLOW CHANNEL
1
12
FME09/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF FLOW
VISUALIZATION IN CHANNELS
10
13
FME09/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW
VISUALIZATION IN CHANNELS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
14
FME 12
SERIAL-PARALLEL PUMPS
1
15
FME12/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SERIAL-PARALLEL PUMPS
10
16
FME12/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SERIALPARALLEL PUMPS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
17
FME 18
FLOW METER DEMONSTRATION
1
18
FME18/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF FLOW
METER DEMONSTRATION
10
19
FME18/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW
METER DEMONSTRATION (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
FME 19
CAVITATION DEMONSTRATION
1
21
FME19/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CAVITATION DEMONSTRATION
10
22
FME19/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CAVITATION DEMONSTRATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
23
FME20
LAMINAR FLOW DEMONSTRATION
1
Ref: 0813-811/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
2 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
24
FME20/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
LAMINAR FLOW DEMOSTRATION
10
25
FME20/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
LAMINAR FLOW DEMONSTRATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
26
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
27
BDAS
BASIC DATA ADQUISITION SYSTEM AND SENSORS
FOR BEING USED WITH FME EDIBON SERIE,
FORMED BY:
ELECTRONIC BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
SPECIFIC SOFTWARE AND SENSORS FOR EACH FME
UNIT
1
IB
DAB
BDAS/SOF
1
1
8
28
0811PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
29
0811PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
30
0811IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
31
0811CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
32
0811TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
33
0811MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0813-811/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
Modules
1
Base Service Units
2
FME00
Modules
(FME17)
(FME03)
(FME01)
(FME08)
(FME07)
(FME21)
or
FME00/B
(FME15)
(FME09)
(FME18)
(FME04)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME05)
(FME25)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
(FME24)
+
(FME16)
(FME14)
(FME19)
FME../SOF.
Student/Module
Software
(FME13)
(FME10)
4
(FME11)
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(FME27)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME20)
(FME06)
(FME22)
(FME26)
(FME12)
(FME23)
(FME02)
5
Other modules
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition System and
sensors
Other modules
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Base Service Unit +
Module/s is the minimum supply)
Available Modules
-FME01. Impact of a Jet.
-FME12. Series/Parallel Pumps.
-FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
-FME02. Flow over Weirs.
-FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
-FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
-FME14. Free and Forced Vortices.
-FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy ’s
Equation).
-FME04. Orifice Discharge.
-FME15. Water Hammer.
-FME05. Energy Losses in Bends.
-FME16. Pelton Turbine.
-FME06. Osborne-Reynolds’ Demonstration.
-FME17. Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
-FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes.
-FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration.
-FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure.
-FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration.
-FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels.
-FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
-FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator.
-FME21. Radial Flow Turbine.
-FME11. Metacentric Height.
-FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
-FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
-FME26.
Depression Measurement System
(Vacuum gauge).
-FME27. Axial Flow Turbine.
-FME28. Francis Turbine.
-FME29. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Laboratory structure
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Base Service Units
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Every module needs being provided with water in order to run the experiment. There are two options:
FME00. Hydraulics Bench
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Mobile hydraulic bench, made in fibreglass reinforced
polyester, and mounted on wheels for mobility.
Centrifugal pump, 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.1-12.8
m., single phase 220V. / 50Hz or 110V./60Hz.
Runner made in stainless steel.
Sump tank capacity: 165 litres. Small channel: 8 litres.
Flow measurement: volumetric tank, gauged from 0 to 7
litres for low flow values and from 0 to 40 litres for high
flow values.
Control valve for regulating the flow.
Open channel to place the test module.
Measuring cylinder is provided for the measurement of
small flow rates.
Remote hand-operating dump valve in the base of the
volumetric tank.
Rapidity and ease interchanging of the different modules.
Dimensions (approx.): 1130 x 730 x 1000 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME00/B. Basic Hydraulic Feed System
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The FME00/B is a service unit for different Fluid
Mechanics Area units.
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single-phase 220V. / 50Hz. or 110V. / 60Hz.
Stainless steel impeller.
Tank capacity:140 litres approx.
Flowmeter. Membrane type flow adjusting valve.
Pump breaker starting. Safety differential switch.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 600 x 700 mm.
Weight: 40Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
2
Modules
Every module is a set of components that allows the realization of several experiments on Hydraulics. EDIBON offers 29 different models covering the most important topics
in the learning of Fluid Mechanics. Every Fluid Mechanics Module has its own manuals (8 manuals are normally supplied), that gives the theoretical background and
explains everything the student need to carry out the exercises/experiments.
Connectors, pipes and cables for completing the exercises and practices are supplied.
FME01. Impac of a jet
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Jet diameter: 8 mm.
Impact surfaces diameter: 40 mm.
Impact surfaces:
180° hemispherical surface.
120° curve surface.
90° flat surface.
A set of masses of 5, 10, 50 and 100 g. is supplied.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 250 x 250 x 500 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Impact against a flat surface.
Impact against a curve surface of 120º.
Impact against a hemispherical surface.
Use of the fast connectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME02. Flow over Weirs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Dimensions of the weirs: 160x230x40mm.
Neckline angle in the V-shape weir: 90º.
Dimension of rectangular notch: 30x82mm.
Scale of the level meter: 0 to 160 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 16 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a
rectangular neckline, made on a thin wall.
2.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a Vshape neckline, made on a thin wall.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Number of manometer tubes: 8
Upstream diameter of the throat: 25 mm.
Narrowing:
Downstream: 21°.
Upstream: 10°.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800 x450 x 700 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s Theorem. Divergentconvergent position.
3.- Determination of Bernoulli’s Theorem equation.
Convergent-divergent position.
4.- Observation of differences between convergent and
divergent position.
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Transparent cylindrical tank.
Five type of mouthpieces: diaphragm, colloidal, 2 of
Venturi and cylindrical.
Height of maximum load: 400 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 450 x 900 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME05. Energy Losses in Bends
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Range of the two type Bourdon manometers: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Differential manometers range: 0 to 500 mm.
Number of manometric tubes: 12.
PVC Rigid pipes:
Internal dia.: 25 mm., external dia.:32 mm.
Flexible pipes:
Pressure taking-differential Manometer. External
dia.: 10 mm.
Pressurizing equipment. External diameter: 6 mm.
Drain. External diameter: 25 mm.
Fittings:
45º angle, 90º curve, 90º medium elbow, 90º
short elbow, 90º long elbow, broadening of
25/40, narrowing of 40/25.
Membrane valves, diameter 25 mm. Antireturn 6 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x550x950 mm. Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
2.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
3.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
4.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
5.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
6.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
7.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
8.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
9.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
10.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
11.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
12.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
13.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Venturi type.
14.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
15.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Measurement of the flow.
3.- Measurement of load losses for a short elbow of 90º.
4.- Measurement of load losses for a middle elbow of 90º.
5.- Measurement of load losses for a curve of 90º.
6.- Measurement of load losses for a broadening of 25/40.
7.- Measurement of load losses for a narrowing 40/25.
8.- Measurement of load losses for an angle of 45º.
9.- Measurement of load losses for a membrane valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME06. Osborne- Reynolds Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tube inner diameter: 10 mm.
Tube outer diameter: 13 mm.
Visualization pipe length: 700 mm.
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Tank capacity: 10 litres.
Flow control valve: diaphragm type.
The coloured fluid is regulated with a needle valve.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1250x450x450mm.Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Observation of the laminar, transition and turbulent
regime.
2.- Study of the velocity profile, reproducing the OsborneReynolds’s experiment.
3.- Reynolds’s number calculation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Test pipe of 4 mm. of inner diameter, 6 mm. of external
diameter and 500 mm. of length.
1 differential manometer of water column.
Manometer scale: 0 to 500 mm (water).
2 Bourdon type manometers, range: 0 to 2 bar.
Tank of constant height.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 330 x 330 x 900 mm.
Weight: 30Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 7
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Energy loss in pipes for a turbulent regimen.
2.- Determination of the energy loss in a turbulent regimen.
3.- Determination of the number of Reynolds for a turbulent
regimen.
4.- Energy loss in pipes for a laminar regimen.
5.- Determination of the energy loss factor f for a pipe in
laminar regimen.
6.- Determination of Reynolds number for the laminar regimen.
7.- Determination of the kinematic viscosity of water.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME04. Orifice Discharge
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank capacity: 5.5 l.
Distance between suspended masses and the support
point: 285 mm.
Area of the section: 0.007 m².
Total depth of submerged quadrant: 160 mm.
Height of support point on the quadrant: 100 mm.
A set of masses of different weights is supplied (4 of 100
gr., 1 of 50 gr., 5 of 10 gr. and 1 of 5 gr.).
Dimensions (approx.): 550 x 250 x 350 mm. Weight:5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of channel approx.: 15/630 mm. Depth of
channel approx.: 150 mm.
Damping tank.
Hydrodynamic models: 2 lengthened, 2 circular of 25
and 50 mm. dia., rectangle with rounded edges, wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 900 x 450 x 500 mm.
Weight: 7Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90°, partially submerged.
2.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°,
partially submerged.
3.- Determination of the center of pressures, angle <> 90°
partially submerged.
4.- Determination of the equivalent force with an angle
<>90° partially submerged.
5.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90° totally submerged.
6.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°
totally submerged.
7.- Determination of the center of pressures, <>90° totally
submerged.
8.- Determination of the resultant force, angle <>90° totally
submerged.
9.- Balance of momentum.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Leakage of liquids by thin-wall weirs.
2.- Liquid leakage by thick-wall weirs.
3.- Models with wing profile submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
4.- Circular models submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
5.- Demonstration of the phenomenon associated to the flow
in open channels.
6.- Visualization of the flow lines around different submerged
hydrodynamic models.
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Pressure manometer: Bourdon type. 0 - 2.5 bar.
Masses (approx. weights): 0.5 kg. 1.0 kg. 2.5 kg. 5 kg.
Piston diameter: 18 mm. Piston weight: 0.5 kg.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 4Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Bourdon type manometer calibration.
2.- Hysteresis curve determination.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME11. Metacentric Height
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Maximum angle: +/- 13°.
Corresponding lineal dimension: +/- 90 mm.
Dimension of the float:
Length: 353 mm. Width: 204 mm. Total height:475 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Angular
displacements.
2.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Different positions of
the center of gravity.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME 12. Series/Parallel Pumps
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single- phase, 220V./50Hz or 110V./60 Hz.
Absolute pressure manometer at the pump admission,
range - 1 to 3 bar.
2 manometers placed one of them in the discharge and
the another one in the discharge accessory, range: 0 - 4
bar. Membrane valve for flow regulating. Two way valve:
2 positions: open or close.
Accessories: two flexible pipes with quick connections,
reinforced pipe with quick connections. Discharge
accessory.Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions of FME12(approx.): 500x400x400 mm.
approx.
Dimensions of discharge accessory: 500 x400 x250mm.
approx.
Weight: 30Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-H(Q) curve obtaining of a centrifugal pump.
2.-Series coupling of two pumps with the same characteristics.
3.-Parallel coupling of two pumps with the same
characteristics.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m. Speed variator.
Discharge accessory.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 500 x1250 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 8
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Obtaining of the curves H(Q), N(Q), Eff%(Q) of a
centrifugal pump.
2.- Making of the map of a centrifugal pump.
3.- Representation of the adimensional curves H*, N* and
rpm*.
4.- Series coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
5.- Series coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
6.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
7.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME14. Free and Forced Vortices
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank diameter: 300 mm.
Tank height: 300 mm.
Mouthpieces orifice diameters: 8, 16 and 24 mm.
Distance between centers: 0, 30, 50, 70, 90 and 110mm.
Pitot tube with measuring points at: 15, 20, 25 and 30mm
radius and a scale.
Measurement bridge.
Inlet pipes: 9 and 12.5 mm. diameter.
Diameter measurement system by Nonius.
Blind mouthpiece with X-shaped crosses.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of forced vortex without discharge orifice.
2.- Study of forced vortex with discharge orifice.
3.- Study of the free vortex.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME15. Water Hammer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Constant level deposit, in methacrylate.
Unload deposit, in methacrylate.
Pipe circuits in PVC.
Valves to select the circuit.
2 adjustable equilibrium chimneys and subjection clips.
Connections to the Hydraulics Bench (FME00) or Basic
Hydraulic Feed System (FME00/B) with fast plugs.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx).:1215x270x1430mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Subduing of the water hammer effects.
2.- Study of the subduing in function of the diameter of the
chimney.
3.- Calculations of the energy losses in pipes.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME16. Pelton Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Speed range: 0 - 2000 r.p.m. Torque: 10 W.
Manometer range: 0 - 2.5 bar.
Number of buckets: 16.
Drum radius: 30 mm.
Dynamometers range: 0 - 20 N.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.):750x400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Pelton’s
Turbine.
2.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
3.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
4.- Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME17. Orifice & Free Jet Flow
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Orifices with diameters of 3.5 and 6 mm.
Jet trajectory Probes: 8.
Maximum height: 500 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the orifice velocity coefficient.
2.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in permanent
regime.
3.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in variable
regime.
4.- Obtaining of the tank discharge time.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 500 mm of water column.
Number of manometric tubes: 8
Orifice plate diameter: 25 mm.
Flowmeter: 2 to 30 l/min.
Venturi dimensions:
Throat diameter: 20 mm. Upstream pipe diameter:
32 mm. Downstream taper: 21°.
Upstream taper: 14°.
Orifice Plate dimensions:
Upstream pipe diameter: 35 mm.
Downstream orifice diameter: 19 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 450 x 950 mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 9
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
Venturi.
3.- Determination of the Cd factor in the Venturi.
4.- Determination of the strangulation in the Venturi.
5.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
orifice plate.
6.- Determination of the Cd factor in the orifice plate.
7.- Determination of the effective area in an orifice plate.
8.- Comparison of the energy loss in the three different
elements.
9.- Comparison among the Venturi, orifice plate and
flowmeter.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Vacuum gauge range: from-1 to 0 bar.
Throat section: 36 mm².
Normal section: 150 mm².
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm. Weight:5Kg.
1.- Study of cavitation.
2.- Visualization of the cavitation phenomenon with forced
conduction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of the table: 400/210 mm.
Depth of the table: adjustable depending on the models.
Hydrodynamic models:
Two circular ones of 25 and 50 mm. diameter.
Two rectangular ones of 25x25 and 50x50 mm.
Wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 870x450 x 400 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ideal flow around a submerged cylinder.
Ideal flow around a submerged profile.
Ideal flow around a body in peak.
Ideal flow in a convergent channel.
Ideal flow in a divergent channel.
Ideal flow in an elbow of 90º.
Ideal flow in a sudden contraction.
Ideal flow in a sudden broadening.
Substitution of a line of current for a solid edge.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME21. Radial Flow Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzles:
inlet diameter: 21 mm., outlet diameter: 2.0 mm.,
discharge angle: 180º.
Turbine rotor:
external diameter:69 mm., internal diameter:40 mm.,
number of nozzles: 2., inlet angle to the nozzle: 180º.,
outlet angle to the nozzle: 180.º, used material:
aluminium.
Brake:
pulley diameter:60 mm., Effective diameter: 50 mm.
Water pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase 220 V.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x 800 mm.
Weight: 50Kg.
1.2.3.4.-
Flow calculation.
Obtaining of the M (n, Ha ), N(n, Ha ), h (n, Ha ) curves.
Obtaining of the M (n, Q), Nm(n, Q), h (n, Q) curves.
Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer (type Bourdon), range: 0-2.5 bar.
Manometer(type Bourdon), range: 0-(-1) bar.
2 tanks, height: 135 mm and internal diameter: 64 mm.
Venturi tube with 6 tappings (Divergent/Convergent).
Differential manometers: 0-500mm.
5 manometric tubes.
Quick connection system incorporated.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x400x850 mm. Weight:10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to fill the manometric tubes.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
Bernoulli’s theorem study.
4.- Cavitation study.
5.- Pressure reduction in a tank.
6.- Aspiration pump.
7.- Aspiration pump for mixing two liquids.
8.- Using for air and water mixing.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminum structure where the pipe network is
located and the subjection panel of the manometers.
Pipe network. This pipe network has been mounted with 4
pipes, each one with a valve to let the flow of water run
through the corresponding pipe.
Test pipes: two 20mm wide PVC pipes, one 16mm wide
PVC pipe and one 10mm wide methacrylate pipe.
8 eight pressure intakes, connected to a manometric
tubes panel of pressurized water.
The pressurization in made by a manual pump.
Manometric tubes panel: number of manometric tubes:
8, range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Inlet pipe. Outlet pipe. Regulation valve for controlling
the flow through the network.
Adjustable legs for leveling the unit.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x350x800mm. Weight: 50Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 10
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- Load loss in a PVC pipe .
2.- Load loss in a methacrylate pipe.
.
3.- Study of the load loss in pipes made of the same material.
4.- Study of the load loss in function of the material.
5.- Friction coefficient in a PVC pipe.
6.- Friction coefficient in a methacrylate pipe.
7.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the material.
8.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the diameter.
9.- Configuration of network in parallel for pipes of the
same material and different diameter.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0-300 mm. water.
Number of manometric tubes: 8.
Strangulation diameter upstream: 25 mm.
Narrowing: upstream: 10º, downstream: 21º.
Venturi’s tube with Pitot tube.
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 1.0
to 1.5 mm (FME24/A).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 2.5
to 3.5 mm (FME24/B).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 5.5
to 7.0 mm (FME24/C).
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x450x700 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
divergent - convergent position.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
convergent-divergent position.
3.- Direct measurement of the static height and total
distribution of heights in Venturi’s tubes.
4.- Determination of the exact section in a Venturi’s tube.
5.- Head losses in the porous bed (elements FME24/A,
FME24/B and FME24/C).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Channel of rectangular section with transparent walls in
methacrylate, section: 80 mm., length: 1 m.
Rigid and flexible pipes. Regulating valves.
Storage tank. Tank with soothing of flow.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1500x500x500mm.Weight:40 Kg
Available accessories:
FME25TP. Pitot tube.
FME25CV. Vertical plane gate.
FME25SDL. Syphon.
FME25RMC.Markings for measurement of the water
height.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- To study and demonstrate the properties of fluids in open
channels.
2.- Measurement of water height and velocity along the
channel.
3.- Flow control by floodgates.
4.- Level control using syphons.
5.- Calculation of water flow.
Other possible practices:
6.- Filling of the Pitot tube.
7.- Use of markings for measuring the water height.
FME26. Depression Measurement System (vacuum gauge).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure.
Pressure-vacuum gauge adjusted from -1 to 0 bar.
Quick connections.
Dimensions (approx.): 220 x110 x 42 0 mm. Weight: 2Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME27. Axial Flow Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzle:
inlet dia. of the throat: 2.5 mm., outlet dia. of the
throat: 2.5 mm., discharge angle: 20º and 30º.
Turbine Rotor:
external dia.:53 mm., internal dia.: 45 mm., number
of blades: 40, inlet angle of the blades: 40º, outlet
angle of the blades: 40º, used material: brass.
Brake:
pulley diameter: 60 mm., real diameter: 50 mm.
Water Pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase,220 V.
Bourdon type manometer.
8 ball valves.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x800 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-To measure the depression caused for the fluid aspiration by
an hydraulic pump.
2.-We can observe the different negative readings due to the
different methods of fluid aspiration for its subsequent
impulsion.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Flow calculation.
2.- Determination of the discharge coefficient of the nozzle.
3.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n),
(20º nozzle).
4.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n);
(30º nozzle).
5.- A dimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME28. Francis Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Francis turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output aprox.: 2.8W.
Impeller: external diameter 50mm,width of vanes 5mm, 7
vanes.
Guide vanes: 6 off, adjustable.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the typical turbine curves.
2.- Turbine power output versus speed and flow rate at
various heads.
3.- Effect of guide vane setting on turbine performance.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME29. Kaplan Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Kaplan Turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output approx. 5 W.
Six adjustable guide vanes.
Guide rotary blades.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Kaplan
Turbine.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
4.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
5.- Adimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (FME../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment with is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
FME../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory
has been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the lab exercises and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
- FME01/SOF. Impact of a Jet.
- FME02/SOF. Flow over Weirs.
- FME03/SOF. Bernoulli’s Theorem
Demonstration.
- FME04/SOF. Orifice Discharge.
- FME05/SOF. Energy Losses in Bends.
- FME06/SOF. Osborne-Reynolds
Demonstration.
- FME07/SOF. Energy Losses in Pipes.
- FME08/SOF. Hydrostatic Pressure.
- FME09/SOF. Flow Visualization in Channels.
- FME10/SOF. Dead Weight Calibrator.
- FME11/SOF. Metacentric Height.
- FME12/SOF.
- FME13/SOF.
- FME14/SOF.
- FME15/SOF.
- FME16/SOF.
- FME17/SOF.
- FME18/SOF.
- FME19/SOF.
- FME20/SOF.
- FME21/SOF.
- FME22/SOF.
- FME23/SOF.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
Laminar Flow Demonstration.
Radial Flow Unit.
Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/SOF. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds in
Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/SOF. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/SOF. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/SOF. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/SOF. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/SOF. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 12
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
4
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basis Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
Available Software Packages:
- FME01/CAL.
- FME02/CAL.
- FME03/CAL.
- FME04/CAL.
- FME05/CAL.
- FME06/CAL.
- FME07/CAL.
- FME08/CAL.
- FME09/CAL.
- FME10/CAL.
- FME11/CAL.
- FME12/CAL.
Impact of a Jet.
Flow over Weirs.
Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
Orifice Discharge.
Energy Losses in Bends.
Osborne-Reynolds Demonstration.
Energy Losses in Pipes.
Hydrostatic Pressure.
Flow Visualization in Channels.
Dead Weight Calibrator.
Metacentric Height.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
- FME13/CAL.
- FME14/CAL.
- FME15/CAL.
- FME16/CAL.
- FME17/CAL.
- FME18/CAL.
- FME19/CAL.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
- FME20/CAL. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
- FME21/CAL. Radial Flow Turbine.
- FME22/CAL. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation
Unit.
5
- FME23/CAL. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/CAL. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/CAL. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/CAL. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/CAL. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/CAL. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/CAL. Kaplan Turbine.
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition Systems and sensors
For being used with modules type ”FME”.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 13
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Software (continuation)
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY FLUID MECHANICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0813-812/10S
ITEM
1 / 4
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIFLUBA
BASIC FLUIDS MECHANICS INTEGRATED
LABORATORY. FORMED BY:
1
1
FME 00
HYDRAULICS BENCH
1
2
FME 02
FLOW OVER WEIRS
1
3
FME02/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF FLOW
OVER WEIRS.
10
4
FME02/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW
OVER WEIRS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
5
FME 04
ORIFICE DISCHARGE
1
6
FME04/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ORIFICE DISCHARGE
10
7
FME04/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ORIFICE DISCHARGE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
8
FME 10
DEAD WEIGHT CALIBRATOR
1
9
FME10/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF DEAD
WEIGHT CALIBRATOR
10
10
FME10/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR DEAD
WEIGHT CALIBRATOR (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
11
FME 11
METACENTRIC HEIGHT
1
12
FME11/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
METACENTRIC HEIGHT
10
13
FME11/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
METACENTRIC HEIGHT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
14
FME 14
FREE AND FORCED VORTICES
1
15
FME14/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF FREE
AND FORCED VORTICES
10
16
FME14/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FREE
AND FORCED VORTICES (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
17
FME 15
HYDRAULIC HAMMER
1
18
FME15/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
WATER HAMMER.
10
19
FME15/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR WATER
HAMMER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
FME 16
PELTON TURBINE
1
21
FME16/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
PELTON TURBINE.
10
22
FME16/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR PELTON
TURBINE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
23
FME 17
ORIFICE AND FREE JET FLOW
1
24
FME17/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ORIFICE AND FREE JET FLOW
10
Ref: 0813-812/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
2 / 4
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
25
FME17/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ORIFICE AND FREE JET FLOW (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
26
FME21
RADIAL FLOW TURBINE
1
27
FME21/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
RADIAL FLOW TURBINE.
10
28
FME21/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR RADIAL
FLOW TURBINE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
29
FME22
VENTURI,BERNOULLI AND CAVITATION
1
30
FME22/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
VENTURI, BERNOULLI AND CAVITATION.
10
31
FME22/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
VENTURI, BERNOULLI AND CAVITATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
32
FME23
BASIC PIPE NETWORK EQUIPMENT
1
33
FME23/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BASIC PIPE NETWORK.
10
34
FME23/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC
PIPE NETWORK (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
35
FME24
EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF POROUS BEDS IN TUBES
(DARCY´S EQUATION)
1
36
FME24/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
STUDY OF POROUS BEDS IN VENTURI TUBES
(DARCY´S EQUATION) CAI
10
37
FME24/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR STUDY
OF POROUS BEDS IN VENTURI TUBES (DACY´S
EQUATION) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
38
FME25
FLOW CHANNEL, 1M. LENGTH, (WITHOUT
ACCESORIES)
1
39
FME25/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF FLOW
CHANNEL.
10
40
FME25/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW
CHANNEL. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
41
FME25/A
1
FME25TP
FME25CV
FME25SDL
FME25RM
ACCESORIES FOR FLOW CHANNEL, 1M. LENGHT.
FORMED BY:
PILOT TUBE AND MANOMETER BOARD
VERTICAL PLANE GATE
SYPHON SPILWAY
MARKINGS FOR MEASUREMENT OF THE WATER HEIGTH
1
1
1
1
42
FME26
DEPRESSION MEASUREMENT SYSTEM (VACUUM GAGE)
1
43
FME26/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DEPRESSION MEASUREMENT SYSTEM (VACUUM GAGE).
10
44
FME26/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DEPRESSION MEASUREMENT SYSTEM (VACUUM GAGE)
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
45
FME27
AXIAL FLOW TURBINE
1
46
FME27/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
AXIAL FLOW TURBINE.
10
Ref: 0813-812/10S
ITEM
3 / 4
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
47
FME27/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR AXIAL
FLOW TURBINE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
48
FME28
FRANCIS TURBINE
1
49
FME28/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FRANCIS TURBINE
10
50
FME28/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS) OF
FRANCIS TURBINE
10
51
FME29
KAPLAN TURBINE
1
52
FME29/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
KAPLAN TURBINE
10
53
FME29/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS) OF
KAPLAN TURBINE
10
54
FME30
VORTEX FLOW METER
1
55
FME30/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
VORTEX FLOW METER
10
56
FME30/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
VORTEX FLOW METER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS).
10
57
FME31
HORIZONTAL OSBORNE-REYNOLDS DEMONSTRATION
1
58
FME31/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
HORIZONTAL OSBORNE-REYNOLDS DEMONSTRATION
10
59
FME31/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
HORIZONTAL OSBORNE-REYNOLDS DEMONSTRATION
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS).
10
60
FME32
PITOT STATIC TUBE MODULE
1
61
FME32/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
PITOT STATIC TUBE MODULE
10
62
FME32/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
PITOT STATIC TUBE MODULE (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS).
10
63
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
64
BDAS
BASIC DATA ADQUISITION SYSTEM AND SENSORS
FOR BEING USED WITH FME EDIBON SERIE,
FORMED BY:
ELECTRONIC BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
SPECIFIC SOFTWARE AND SENSORS FOR EACH FME
UNIT
1
IB
DAB
BDAS/SOF
1
1
20
65
0811PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
66
0811PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
67
0811IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
68
0811CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
69
0811TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
70
0811MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0813-812/10S
4 / 4
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
Modules
1
Base Service Units
2
FME00
Modules
(FME17)
(FME03)
(FME01)
(FME08)
(FME07)
(FME21)
or
FME00/B
(FME15)
(FME09)
(FME18)
(FME04)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME05)
(FME25)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
(FME24)
+
(FME16)
(FME14)
(FME19)
FME../SOF.
Student/Module
Software
(FME13)
(FME10)
4
(FME11)
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(FME27)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Teaching
Technique
used
(FME20)
(FME06)
(FME22)
(FME26)
(FME12)
(FME23)
(FME02)
5
Other modules
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition System and
sensors
Other modules
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Base Service Unit +
Module/s is the minimum supply)
Available Modules
-FME01. Impact of a Jet.
-FME12. Series/Parallel Pumps.
-FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
-FME02. Flow over Weirs.
-FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
-FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
-FME14. Free and Forced Vortices.
-FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy ’s
Equation).
-FME04. Orifice Discharge.
-FME15. Water Hammer.
-FME05. Energy Losses in Bends.
-FME16. Pelton Turbine.
-FME06. Osborne-Reynolds’ Demonstration.
-FME17. Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
-FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes.
-FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration.
-FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure.
-FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration.
-FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels.
-FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
-FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator.
-FME21. Radial Flow Turbine.
-FME11. Metacentric Height.
-FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
-FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
-FME26.
Depression Measurement System
(Vacuum gauge).
-FME27. Axial Flow Turbine.
-FME28. Francis Turbine.
-FME29. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Laboratory structure
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Base Service Units
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Every module needs being provided with water in order to run the experiment. There are two options:
FME00. Hydraulics Bench
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Mobile hydraulic bench, made in fibreglass reinforced
polyester, and mounted on wheels for mobility.
Centrifugal pump, 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.1-12.8
m., single phase 220V. / 50Hz or 110V./60Hz.
Runner made in stainless steel.
Sump tank capacity: 165 litres. Small channel: 8 litres.
Flow measurement: volumetric tank, gauged from 0 to 7
litres for low flow values and from 0 to 40 litres for high
flow values.
Control valve for regulating the flow.
Open channel to place the test module.
Measuring cylinder is provided for the measurement of
small flow rates.
Remote hand-operating dump valve in the base of the
volumetric tank.
Rapidity and ease interchanging of the different modules.
Dimensions (approx.): 1130 x 730 x 1000 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME00/B. Basic Hydraulic Feed System
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The FME00/B is a service unit for different Fluid
Mechanics Area units.
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single-phase 220V. / 50Hz. or 110V. / 60Hz.
Stainless steel impeller.
Tank capacity:140 litres approx.
Flowmeter. Membrane type flow adjusting valve.
Pump breaker starting. Safety differential switch.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 600 x 700 mm.
Weight: 40Kg.
1.-Flow measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
2
Modules
Every module is a set of components that allows the realization of several experiments on Hydraulics. EDIBON offers 29 different models covering the most important topics
in the learning of Fluid Mechanics. Every Fluid Mechanics Module has its own manuals (8 manuals are normally supplied), that gives the theoretical background and
explains everything the student need to carry out the exercises/experiments.
Connectors, pipes and cables for completing the exercises and practices are supplied.
FME01. Impac of a jet
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Jet diameter: 8 mm.
Impact surfaces diameter: 40 mm.
Impact surfaces:
180° hemispherical surface.
120° curve surface.
90° flat surface.
A set of masses of 5, 10, 50 and 100 g. is supplied.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 250 x 250 x 500 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Impact against a flat surface.
Impact against a curve surface of 120º.
Impact against a hemispherical surface.
Use of the fast connectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME02. Flow over Weirs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Dimensions of the weirs: 160x230x40mm.
Neckline angle in the V-shape weir: 90º.
Dimension of rectangular notch: 30x82mm.
Scale of the level meter: 0 to 160 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 16 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a
rectangular neckline, made on a thin wall.
2.- Study of the flow characteristics through a weir with a Vshape neckline, made on a thin wall.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME03. Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Number of manometer tubes: 8
Upstream diameter of the throat: 25 mm.
Narrowing:
Downstream: 21°.
Upstream: 10°.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800 x450 x 700 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s Theorem. Divergentconvergent position.
3.- Determination of Bernoulli’s Theorem equation.
Convergent-divergent position.
4.- Observation of differences between convergent and
divergent position.
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Transparent cylindrical tank.
Five type of mouthpieces: diaphragm, colloidal, 2 of
Venturi and cylindrical.
Height of maximum load: 400 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 450 x 900 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME05. Energy Losses in Bends
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Range of the two type Bourdon manometers: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Differential manometers range: 0 to 500 mm.
Number of manometric tubes: 12.
PVC Rigid pipes:
Internal dia.: 25 mm., external dia.:32 mm.
Flexible pipes:
Pressure taking-differential Manometer. External
dia.: 10 mm.
Pressurizing equipment. External diameter: 6 mm.
Drain. External diameter: 25 mm.
Fittings:
45º angle, 90º curve, 90º medium elbow, 90º
short elbow, 90º long elbow, broadening of
25/40, narrowing of 40/25.
Membrane valves, diameter 25 mm. Antireturn 6 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x550x950 mm. Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
2.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
3.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, Venturi type.
4.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
5.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
6.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, diaphragm type.
7.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
8.- Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
9.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thin wall, colloidal type.
10.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
11.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
12.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, cylindrical type.
13.- Determination of the discharge coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Venturi type.
14.-Determination of the velocity coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
15.- Determination of the contraction coefficient for the
mouthpiece of thick wall, Ventury type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Measurement of the flow.
3.- Measurement of load losses for a short elbow of 90º.
4.- Measurement of load losses for a middle elbow of 90º.
5.- Measurement of load losses for a curve of 90º.
6.- Measurement of load losses for a broadening of 25/40.
7.- Measurement of load losses for a narrowing 40/25.
8.- Measurement of load losses for an angle of 45º.
9.- Measurement of load losses for a membrane valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME06. Osborne- Reynolds Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tube inner diameter: 10 mm.
Tube outer diameter: 13 mm.
Visualization pipe length: 700 mm.
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Tank capacity: 10 litres.
Flow control valve: diaphragm type.
The coloured fluid is regulated with a needle valve.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1250x450x450mm.Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Observation of the laminar, transition and turbulent
regime.
2.- Study of the velocity profile, reproducing the OsborneReynolds’s experiment.
3.- Reynolds’s number calculation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME07. Energy Losses in Pipes
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Test pipe of 4 mm. of inner diameter, 6 mm. of external
diameter and 500 mm. of length.
1 differential manometer of water column.
Manometer scale: 0 to 500 mm (water).
2 Bourdon type manometers, range: 0 to 2 bar.
Tank of constant height.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 330 x 330 x 900 mm.
Weight: 30Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 7
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Energy loss in pipes for a turbulent regimen.
2.- Determination of the energy loss in a turbulent regimen.
3.- Determination of the number of Reynolds for a turbulent
regimen.
4.- Energy loss in pipes for a laminar regimen.
5.- Determination of the energy loss factor f for a pipe in
laminar regimen.
6.- Determination of Reynolds number for the laminar regimen.
7.- Determination of the kinematic viscosity of water.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME04. Orifice Discharge
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME08. Hydrostatic Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank capacity: 5.5 l.
Distance between suspended masses and the support
point: 285 mm.
Area of the section: 0.007 m².
Total depth of submerged quadrant: 160 mm.
Height of support point on the quadrant: 100 mm.
A set of masses of different weights is supplied (4 of 100
gr., 1 of 50 gr., 5 of 10 gr. and 1 of 5 gr.).
Dimensions (approx.): 550 x 250 x 350 mm. Weight:5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME09. Flow Visualization in Channels
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of the dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of channel approx.: 15/630 mm. Depth of
channel approx.: 150 mm.
Damping tank.
Hydrodynamic models: 2 lengthened, 2 circular of 25
and 50 mm. dia., rectangle with rounded edges, wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 900 x 450 x 500 mm.
Weight: 7Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90°, partially submerged.
2.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°,
partially submerged.
3.- Determination of the center of pressures, angle <> 90°
partially submerged.
4.- Determination of the equivalent force with an angle
<>90° partially submerged.
5.- Determination of the center of pressures with an angle of
90° totally submerged.
6.- Determination of the resultant force with an angle of 90°
totally submerged.
7.- Determination of the center of pressures, <>90° totally
submerged.
8.- Determination of the resultant force, angle <>90° totally
submerged.
9.- Balance of momentum.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Leakage of liquids by thin-wall weirs.
2.- Liquid leakage by thick-wall weirs.
3.- Models with wing profile submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
4.- Circular models submerged in a fluid current.
Aerodynamics.
5.- Demonstration of the phenomenon associated to the flow
in open channels.
6.- Visualization of the flow lines around different submerged
hydrodynamic models.
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME10. Dead Weight Calibrator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Pressure manometer: Bourdon type. 0 - 2.5 bar.
Masses (approx. weights): 0.5 kg. 1.0 kg. 2.5 kg. 5 kg.
Piston diameter: 18 mm. Piston weight: 0.5 kg.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 4Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Bourdon type manometer calibration.
2.- Hysteresis curve determination.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME11. Metacentric Height
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Maximum angle: +/- 13°.
Corresponding lineal dimension: +/- 90 mm.
Dimension of the float:
Length: 353 mm. Width: 204 mm. Total height:475 mm.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 5Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Angular
displacements.
2.- Study of the stability of a floating body. Different positions of
the center of gravity.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME 12. Series/Parallel Pumps
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m., single- phase, 220V./50Hz or 110V./60 Hz.
Absolute pressure manometer at the pump admission,
range - 1 to 3 bar.
2 manometers placed one of them in the discharge and
the another one in the discharge accessory, range: 0 - 4
bar. Membrane valve for flow regulating. Two way valve:
2 positions: open or close.
Accessories: two flexible pipes with quick connections,
reinforced pipe with quick connections. Discharge
accessory.Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions of FME12(approx.): 500x400x400 mm.
approx.
Dimensions of discharge accessory: 500 x400 x250mm.
approx.
Weight: 30Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-H(Q) curve obtaining of a centrifugal pump.
2.-Series coupling of two pumps with the same characteristics.
3.-Parallel coupling of two pumps with the same
characteristics.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME13. Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Centrifugal pump: 0.37 KW, 30 - 80 l/min at 20.112.8m. Speed variator.
Discharge accessory.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 450 x 500 x1250 mm.
Weight: 70Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 8
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Obtaining of the curves H(Q), N(Q), Eff%(Q) of a
centrifugal pump.
2.- Making of the map of a centrifugal pump.
3.- Representation of the adimensional curves H*, N* and
rpm*.
4.- Series coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
5.- Series coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
6.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of similar characteristics.
7.- Parallel coupling of two pumps of different characteristics.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME14. Free and Forced Vortices
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Tank diameter: 300 mm.
Tank height: 300 mm.
Mouthpieces orifice diameters: 8, 16 and 24 mm.
Distance between centers: 0, 30, 50, 70, 90 and 110mm.
Pitot tube with measuring points at: 15, 20, 25 and 30mm
radius and a scale.
Measurement bridge.
Inlet pipes: 9 and 12.5 mm. diameter.
Diameter measurement system by Nonius.
Blind mouthpiece with X-shaped crosses.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of forced vortex without discharge orifice.
2.- Study of forced vortex with discharge orifice.
3.- Study of the free vortex.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME15. Water Hammer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Constant level deposit, in methacrylate.
Unload deposit, in methacrylate.
Pipe circuits in PVC.
Valves to select the circuit.
2 adjustable equilibrium chimneys and subjection clips.
Connections to the Hydraulics Bench (FME00) or Basic
Hydraulic Feed System (FME00/B) with fast plugs.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx).:1215x270x1430mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Subduing of the water hammer effects.
2.- Study of the subduing in function of the diameter of the
chimney.
3.- Calculations of the energy losses in pipes.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME16. Pelton Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Speed range: 0 - 2000 r.p.m. Torque: 10 W.
Manometer range: 0 - 2.5 bar.
Number of buckets: 16.
Drum radius: 30 mm.
Dynamometers range: 0 - 20 N.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.):750x400 x 750 mm.
Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Pelton’s
Turbine.
2.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
3.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
4.- Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME17. Orifice & Free Jet Flow
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Orifices with diameters of 3.5 and 6 mm.
Jet trajectory Probes: 8.
Maximum height: 500 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):600x550x1400mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the orifice velocity coefficient.
2.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in permanent
regime.
3.- Obtaining of the orifice discharge coefficient in variable
regime.
4.- Obtaining of the tank discharge time.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME18. Flow Meter Demonstration
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 500 mm of water column.
Number of manometric tubes: 8
Orifice plate diameter: 25 mm.
Flowmeter: 2 to 30 l/min.
Venturi dimensions:
Throat diameter: 20 mm. Upstream pipe diameter:
32 mm. Downstream taper: 21°.
Upstream taper: 14°.
Orifice Plate dimensions:
Upstream pipe diameter: 35 mm.
Downstream orifice diameter: 19 mm.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 450 x 950 mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 9
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Filling of the manometric tubes.
2.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
Venturi.
3.- Determination of the Cd factor in the Venturi.
4.- Determination of the strangulation in the Venturi.
5.- Determination of the error in flow measurements using the
orifice plate.
6.- Determination of the Cd factor in the orifice plate.
7.- Determination of the effective area in an orifice plate.
8.- Comparison of the energy loss in the three different
elements.
9.- Comparison among the Venturi, orifice plate and
flowmeter.
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME19. Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0 to 2.5 bar.
Vacuum gauge range: from-1 to 0 bar.
Throat section: 36 mm².
Normal section: 150 mm².
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750 x 400 x 750 mm. Weight:5Kg.
1.- Study of cavitation.
2.- Visualization of the cavitation phenomenon with forced
conduction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME20. Laminar Flow Demonstration
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Capacity of dye tank: 0.3 litres.
Width/length of the table: 400/210 mm.
Depth of the table: adjustable depending on the models.
Hydrodynamic models:
Two circular ones of 25 and 50 mm. diameter.
Two rectangular ones of 25x25 and 50x50 mm.
Wedge.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 870x450 x 400 mm.
Weight: 10Kg.
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ideal flow around a submerged cylinder.
Ideal flow around a submerged profile.
Ideal flow around a body in peak.
Ideal flow in a convergent channel.
Ideal flow in a divergent channel.
Ideal flow in an elbow of 90º.
Ideal flow in a sudden contraction.
Ideal flow in a sudden broadening.
Substitution of a line of current for a solid edge.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME21. Radial Flow Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzles:
inlet diameter: 21 mm., outlet diameter: 2.0 mm.,
discharge angle: 180º.
Turbine rotor:
external diameter:69 mm., internal diameter:40 mm.,
number of nozzles: 2., inlet angle to the nozzle: 180º.,
outlet angle to the nozzle: 180.º, used material:
aluminium.
Brake:
pulley diameter:60 mm., Effective diameter: 50 mm.
Water pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase 220 V.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x 800 mm.
Weight: 50Kg.
1.2.3.4.-
Flow calculation.
Obtaining of the M (n, Ha ), N(n, Ha ), h (n, Ha ) curves.
Obtaining of the M (n, Q), Nm(n, Q), h (n, Q) curves.
Adimensionalization.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME22. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer (type Bourdon), range: 0-2.5 bar.
Manometer(type Bourdon), range: 0-(-1) bar.
2 tanks, height: 135 mm and internal diameter: 64 mm.
Venturi tube with 6 tappings (Divergent/Convergent).
Differential manometers: 0-500mm.
5 manometric tubes.
Quick connection system incorporated.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 750x400x850 mm. Weight:10Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to fill the manometric tubes.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the exact section in Venturi’s tube.
Bernoulli’s theorem study.
4.- Cavitation study.
5.- Pressure reduction in a tank.
6.- Aspiration pump.
7.- Aspiration pump for mixing two liquids.
8.- Using for air and water mixing.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME23. Basic Pipe Network Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminum structure where the pipe network is
located and the subjection panel of the manometers.
Pipe network. This pipe network has been mounted with 4
pipes, each one with a valve to let the flow of water run
through the corresponding pipe.
Test pipes: two 20mm wide PVC pipes, one 16mm wide
PVC pipe and one 10mm wide methacrylate pipe.
8 eight pressure intakes, connected to a manometric
tubes panel of pressurized water.
The pressurization in made by a manual pump.
Manometric tubes panel: number of manometric tubes:
8, range: 0 to 470 mm of water.
Inlet pipe. Outlet pipe. Regulation valve for controlling
the flow through the network.
Adjustable legs for leveling the unit.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Dimensions (approx.): 600x350x800mm. Weight: 50Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 10
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- Load loss in a PVC pipe .
2.- Load loss in a methacrylate pipe.
.
3.- Study of the load loss in pipes made of the same material.
4.- Study of the load loss in function of the material.
5.- Friction coefficient in a PVC pipe.
6.- Friction coefficient in a methacrylate pipe.
7.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the material.
8.- Study of the friction coefficient in function of the diameter.
9.- Configuration of network in parallel for pipes of the
same material and different diameter.
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
FME24. Unit for the study of Porous Beds in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Manometer range: 0-300 mm. water.
Number of manometric tubes: 8.
Strangulation diameter upstream: 25 mm.
Narrowing: upstream: 10º, downstream: 21º.
Venturi’s tube with Pitot tube.
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 1.0
to 1.5 mm (FME24/A).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 2.5
to 3.5 mm (FME24/B).
Venturi’s tube with porous bed of a grain diameter of 5.5
to 7.0 mm (FME24/C).
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x450x700 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
divergent - convergent position.
2.- Demonstration of Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations in
convergent-divergent position.
3.- Direct measurement of the static height and total
distribution of heights in Venturi’s tubes.
4.- Determination of the exact section in a Venturi’s tube.
5.- Head losses in the porous bed (elements FME24/A,
FME24/B and FME24/C).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME25. Flow Channel, 1m. length
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Channel of rectangular section with transparent walls in
methacrylate, section: 80 mm., length: 1 m.
Rigid and flexible pipes. Regulating valves.
Storage tank. Tank with soothing of flow.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Dimensions (approx.):1500x500x500mm.Weight:40 Kg
Available accessories:
FME25TP. Pitot tube.
FME25CV. Vertical plane gate.
FME25SDL. Syphon.
FME25RMC.Markings for measurement of the water
height.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Some practical possibilities:
1.- To study and demonstrate the properties of fluids in open
channels.
2.- Measurement of water height and velocity along the
channel.
3.- Flow control by floodgates.
4.- Level control using syphons.
5.- Calculation of water flow.
Other possible practices:
6.- Filling of the Pitot tube.
7.- Use of markings for measuring the water height.
FME26. Depression Measurement System (vacuum gauge).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure.
Pressure-vacuum gauge adjusted from -1 to 0 bar.
Quick connections.
Dimensions (approx.): 220 x110 x 42 0 mm. Weight: 2Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME27. Axial Flow Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Nozzle:
inlet dia. of the throat: 2.5 mm., outlet dia. of the
throat: 2.5 mm., discharge angle: 20º and 30º.
Turbine Rotor:
external dia.:53 mm., internal dia.: 45 mm., number
of blades: 40, inlet angle of the blades: 40º, outlet
angle of the blades: 40º, used material: brass.
Brake:
pulley diameter: 60 mm., real diameter: 50 mm.
Water Pump:
maximum pressure: 2.5 bar, maximum water flow: 80
l./min., electrical power: single-phase,220 V.
Bourdon type manometer.
8 ball valves.
Easy and quick coupling system built-in.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 800x900x800 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-To measure the depression caused for the fluid aspiration by
an hydraulic pump.
2.-We can observe the different negative readings due to the
different methods of fluid aspiration for its subsequent
impulsion.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Flow calculation.
2.- Determination of the discharge coefficient of the nozzle.
3.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n),
(20º nozzle).
4.- Determination of the curve N(Q,n), Pm(Q, n) and h(Q, n);
(30º nozzle).
5.- A dimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
FME28. Francis Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Francis turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output aprox.: 2.8W.
Impeller: external diameter 50mm,width of vanes 5mm, 7
vanes.
Guide vanes: 6 off, adjustable.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Determination of the typical turbine curves.
2.- Turbine power output versus speed and flow rate at
various heads.
3.- Effect of guide vane setting on turbine performance.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules
(continuation)
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
FME29. Kaplan Turbine
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Functional model of Kaplan Turbine.
Turbine operating area with transparent cover.
Load indication for braking device using spring balances
10N.
Mounted on base plate.
Turbine: power output approx. 5 W.
Six adjustable guide vanes.
Guide rotary blades.
Manometer.
Easy and quick coupling system.
Anodized aluminium structure built-in.
Tachometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 700x400x700 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
1.- Determination of the operative characteristics of Kaplan
Turbine.
2.- Flow calculation.
3.- Determination of the operation mechanical curves.
4.- Determination of the operation hydraulic curves.
5.- Adimensional analysis.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (FME../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment with is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
FME../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory
has been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the lab exercises and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
- FME01/SOF. Impact of a Jet.
- FME02/SOF. Flow over Weirs.
- FME03/SOF. Bernoulli’s Theorem
Demonstration.
- FME04/SOF. Orifice Discharge.
- FME05/SOF. Energy Losses in Bends.
- FME06/SOF. Osborne-Reynolds
Demonstration.
- FME07/SOF. Energy Losses in Pipes.
- FME08/SOF. Hydrostatic Pressure.
- FME09/SOF. Flow Visualization in Channels.
- FME10/SOF. Dead Weight Calibrator.
- FME11/SOF. Metacentric Height.
- FME12/SOF.
- FME13/SOF.
- FME14/SOF.
- FME15/SOF.
- FME16/SOF.
- FME17/SOF.
- FME18/SOF.
- FME19/SOF.
- FME20/SOF.
- FME21/SOF.
- FME22/SOF.
- FME23/SOF.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
Laminar Flow Demonstration.
Radial Flow Unit.
Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation Unit.
Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/SOF. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds in
Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/SOF. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/SOF. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/SOF. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/SOF. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/SOF. Kaplan Turbine.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 12
8.1- Fluid Mechanics (Basic)
(continuation)
LIFLUBA. Basic Fluids Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
4
FME/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basis Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
Available Software Packages:
- FME01/CAL.
- FME02/CAL.
- FME03/CAL.
- FME04/CAL.
- FME05/CAL.
- FME06/CAL.
- FME07/CAL.
- FME08/CAL.
- FME09/CAL.
- FME10/CAL.
- FME11/CAL.
- FME12/CAL.
Impact of a Jet.
Flow over Weirs.
Bernoulli’s Theorem Demonstration.
Orifice Discharge.
Energy Losses in Bends.
Osborne-Reynolds Demonstration.
Energy Losses in Pipes.
Hydrostatic Pressure.
Flow Visualization in Channels.
Dead Weight Calibrator.
Metacentric Height.
Series/Parallel Pumps.
- FME13/CAL.
- FME14/CAL.
- FME15/CAL.
- FME16/CAL.
- FME17/CAL.
- FME18/CAL.
- FME19/CAL.
Centrifugal Pumps Characteristics.
Free and Forced Vortices.
Water Hammer.
Pelton Turbine.
Orifice and Free Jet Flow.
Flow Meter Demonstration.
Cavitation Phenomenon
Demonstration.
- FME20/CAL. Laminar Flow Demonstration.
- FME21/CAL. Radial Flow Turbine.
- FME22/CAL. Venturi, Bernoulli and Cavitation
Unit.
5
- FME23/CAL. Basic Pipe Network Unit.
- FME24/CAL. Unit for the Study of Porous Beds
in Venturi Tubes (Darcy’s Equation).
- FME25/CAL. Flow Channel, 1m. length.
- FME26/CAL. Depression Measurement System.
- FME27/CAL. Axial Flow Turbine.
- FME28/CAL. Francis Turbine.
- FME29/CAL. Kaplan Turbine.
BDAS. Basic Data Acquisition Systems and sensors
For being used with modules type ”FME”.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/fluidmechanicsbasic/LIFLUBA.pdf
Page 13
www.edibon.com
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Software (continuation)
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.BASIC MODULE
Ref: 1010
1 / 2
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
UCP
UCP-UB
UCP/CIB
DAB
UCP/CCSOF
,
UCP-T
UCP-C
UCP-N
UCP-PA
UCP-pH
UCP-CT
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS
CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
UCP/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
1
3
1010PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
1010PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
1010IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
1010CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
1010TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
1010MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1010
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
UCP. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCP-UB. Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
4.3 UCP-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.4 UCP-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
4.2 UCP-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
+
+
UCP-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.5
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
+
4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCP-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one
or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve.
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or
several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 61
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCN-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
4.4 UCPCN-PA.
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
10.- Process Control
+
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
4.5
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf
Page 62
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCV-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
4.5
UCPCV-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.4
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them
and, if possible, solve them.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections:
Faults affecting the sensors measure:
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to
calibrate the affected sensor through the
values collection.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.)
- Actuators canals interchange at any time
during the program execution.
This error does not admit any solution.
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog
outputs, we can get an response with
a fraction of what it should be, either with a
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...).
Faults in the controls execution:
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it
should be ON
is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct
operating logic.
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total
response.
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the
reduction or increase of the action really applied
to the actuator, and the consequent
instability of the control. The student should notify
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/
UCP.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Incorrect Calibration:
1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
Non Linearity:
5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
Interchange of actuators:
9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
Reduction of an actuator response:
10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
(Affected sensor: pH).
Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
sensor).
The action of some controls is annulled:
13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
control (Proportional-Derivative).
14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
10.- Process Control
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
of different pressure sensor.
2.- Calibration processes.
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
the hysteresis curve.
4.- I/P converter calibration.
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
type.
6.- Determination of the influence of the
flow rate of the conduction.
7.- Pressure control in conduction using
a PID controller.
8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
9.- Characteristics of a proportional
and integral control (P+I).
10.- Characteristics of a proportional
and derivative control (P+D).
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
UCP-P. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and
the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial
process controller.
Steel box.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...).
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 8 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
To study methods and terminology of
process control:
1.-Closed loop control.
2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
3.-To study the step response.
4.-Reference variable step.
To learn and to familiarise with a process
controller:
5.-Configuration level.
6.-Parameter level.
7.-Operation control levels.
Control parameters:
8.-Setting input channels.
9.-Setting output channels.
10.-To use computer (PC) - based
configuration tools.
11.- Scaling displays.
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system
based on a simple application.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation
of a industrial process controller.
Steel box.
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as
analog signals at lab jacks .
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Function of a digital industrial
controller.
2.- Layout of a field bus system.
To learn and to familiarise with the
operation and structure of a process
control system under Profibus DP:
3.- Controller parameter setting via field
bus system.
4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
server function.
6.- Online controller parameters
setting.
7.- Master / slave assignment.
8.- To configure and display alarms.
9.- Reading control variables and
displaying them online.
10.- Scaling displays.
11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability,
disturbance and control response are demonstrated.
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can
recorder and analyse the time response using the software.
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC).
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,
non-linearity and limitation.
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of
time response on computer (PC).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 65
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Operation and function of a digital
industrial controller.
2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
module.
3.- Function of a digital input/output
module.
4.- Layout of a field bus system.
5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
stations.
6.- Defining the bus technology with the
stations.
7.- Reading out and in, and online
displaying of analog and digital
process variables.
8.- Communication protocols.
9.- To define tags.
10.- Familiarisation with the device
master file “DMF”.
11.- OPC server.
12.- Access to the OPC database from
the process control program.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use commonly applied tuning
rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
2.- To study the difference between
open and closed loop control.
3.- Control loop comprising controller
and controlled system.
4.- To determine the system parameters.
5.- Closed-loop control system
response.
6.- Choice of optimum controller
parameters.
7.- Stability, steady state and transient
response.
8.- Study and investigation of control
and disturbance response.
9.- Study of the stability of the closed
control loop.
10.- Learning methods and terminology
involved in process control.
11.- To adapt the process controller to
different controlled systems.
12.- Use and practices with the
simulation software.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP.
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a
Profibus DP interface (master).
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology,
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc.
Steel box.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V.
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V.
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and
process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1010/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
UCP/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
1
1
2
1010PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
1010PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
1010IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
1010CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
1010TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
1010MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
Advanced Energy Laboratory
(5AD)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 3
0200. Electronics
0213-210/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0213-211/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0213-212/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0230: Transducers and Sensors Module
0500. Energy
0522: Energy: Advanced Power Plant Simulator Advanced
0532/10S:Fuel Cells Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0532/PLC: PLCs Module
0533/10S: Bio Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0533/PLC: PLCs Module
0534/10S: Sea Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0534/PLC: PLCs Module
0535/10S: Geothermal Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0535/PLC: PLCs Module
0536/10S: Hidro Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0536/PLC: PLCs Module
0537/10S: Organic Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL)
0537/PLC: PLCs Module
0538/10S: Turbine Troubleshooting Renewable Energies (10 CAI + CAL
0538/PLC: PLCs Module
0600. Automation & Systems
0650: Automation & System Module
0700. Mechanics and Materials
0710/10S: MechanicsBasic Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0900. Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
0910/10S: Refrigeration Basic Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0910/PLC: PLC's Module
0920/10S: Heat PumpsBasic Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0920/PLC: PLC's Module
0930/10S: Air Conditioning Basic Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0930/PLC: PLC's Module
0940/10S: Heating Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0940/PLC: PLC's Module
0950/10S: Heat Transfer Basic Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0950/PLC: PLC's Module
0951: Heat Transfer Medium Module
0951/PLC: PLC's Module
0953/10S: Heat Exchange Basic Module (10 CAI + CAL)
0953/PLC: PLC's Module
0970: Nozzles Module
0970/PLC: PLC's Module
0980: Combustion Module
0980/PLC: PLC's Module
0981:Turbines "Thermal" Module
0981/PLC: PLC's Module
0982:Turbines "Two-Shaft Gas" Module
0982/PLC: PLC's Module
0900/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics Unit
Ref.:5AD-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-210/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M1
D. C. CIRCUITS MODULE
1
3
M1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C
CIRCUITS
10
4
M1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C.
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
5
M2
A. C. CIRCUITS MODULE
1
6
M2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF A.C.
CIRCUITS
10
7
M2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A.C.
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
8
M16
ELECTRICS NETWORKS MODULE
1
9
M16/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ELECTRIC NETWORKS
10
10
M16/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ELECTRICS NETWORKS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
11
M17
ELECTROMAGNETISM MODULE
1
12
M17/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ELECTROMAGNETISM
10
13
M17/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ELECTROMAGNETISM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
14
M3
SEMICONDUCTORS I MODULE
1
15
M3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SEMICONDUCTORS I
10
16
M3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SEMICONDUCTORS I (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
17
M5
POWER SUPPLIES MODULE
1
18
M5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
POWER SUPPLIES
10
19
M5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER
SUPPLIES (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
21
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
22
EDAS/VIS-0.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
1
VIS
DAIB
DAB
1
1
1
Ref: 0213-210/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
22
EDAS/SOF
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
23
0210PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
24
0210PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
25
0210IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
26
0210CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
27
0210TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
28
0210MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-211/10S
ITEM
1 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M4
SEMICONDUCTORS II
1
3
M4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SEMICONDUCTORS II
10
4
M4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SEMICONDUCTORS II (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
5
M6
OSCILATORS MODULE
1
6
M6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OSCILLATORS
10
7
M6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OSCILLATORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
8
M7
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS I MODULE
1
9
M7/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
10
10
M7/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
11
M8
FILTERS MODULE
1
12
M8/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FILTERS
10
13
M8/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
FILTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
14
M9
POWER ELECTRONICS MODULE
1
15
M9/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
POWER ELCTRONICS
10
16
M9/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER
ELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
17
M10
DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS MODULE
1
18
M10/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS
10
19
M10/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DIGITAL SYSTEMS & CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
M11
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS MODULE
1
21
M11/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS
10
22
M11/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
23
M12
BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS MODULE
1
MODULE
Ref: 0213-211/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
2 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
24
M12/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
10
25
M12/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
26
M13
BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS MODULE
1
27
M13/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
10
28
M13/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
29
M14
OPTOELECTRONICS MODULE
1
30
M14/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OPTOELECTRONICS
10
31
M14/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OPTOELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
32
M18
THREE-PHASE CIRCUITS MODULE
1
33
M18/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
THREE-PHASE
10
34
M18/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THREEPHASE CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
35
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
36
EDAS/VIS-0.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
VIS
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
37
EFAC
FUB
EFAC/CIB
DAB
EFAC/CCSOF
FCE
FCM
38
0211PARTS
THREE DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D),
FORMED BY:
BASE STRUCTURE AND ROBOT FOR THREE
DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
PHYSICS SYSTEM
SET FOR ELECTRICAL FIELDS (3D) APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR MAGNETIC FIELDS (3D APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 0213-211/10S
ITEM
3 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
39
0211PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
40
0211IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
41
0211CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
42
0211MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
43
0211TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-212/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M41
RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER MODULE
1
3
M41/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
10
4
M41/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
RESISTANCE TRANSDUCERS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
5
M43
APPLICATIONS OF TEMPERATURE MODULE
1
6
M43/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
APPLICATIONS OF TEMPERATURE
10
7
M43/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
APPLICATIONS OF TEMPERATURE (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
8
M44
APPLICATIONS OF LIGHT MODULE
1
9
M44/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
APPLICATIONS OF LIGHT
10
10
M44/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
APPLICATIONS OF LIGHT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
11
M45
LINEAR POSITION AND FORCE MODULE
1
12
M45/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
LINEAR POSITION AND FORCED
10
13
M45/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LINEAR
POSITION AND FORCE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
14
M46
ENVIROMENTAL MEASUREMENTS MODULE
1
15
M46/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ENVIROMENTAL MEASUREMENTS
10
16
M46/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ENVIRONMENTAL MEASUREMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
17
M47
ROTATIONAL SPEED&POSITON CONTROL MODULE
1
18
M47/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ROTARIONAL SPEED & POSITION CONTROL
10
19
M47/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ROTATIONAL SPEED & POSITION CONTROL
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
M48
SOUND MEASUREMENTS MODULE
1
21
M48/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SOUND MEASUREMENTS
10
22
M48/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SOUNDS
MEASUREMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
23
M49
APPLICATION OF TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
1
Ref: 0213-212/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
2 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
24
M49/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C
CIRCUITS FOR APPLICATION TO TEMPERATURE AND
PRESSURE
10
25
M49/CAL
APPLICATIONSOF TEMPERATURE AND PRESION
10
26
M60
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERTERS MODULE
1
27
M60/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
10
28
M60/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
29
M61
DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTERS MODULE
1
30
M61/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTERS
10
31
M61/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
32
M65
CONTROL AND REGULATION MODULE
1
33
M65/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CONTROL AND REGULATION
10
34
M65/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CONTROL AND REGULATION (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
35
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
36
EDAS/VIS-0.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
37
0212PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
38
0212PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
39
0212IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
40
0212CAPRO
41
0212TD
42
0212MANU
VIS
1
1
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
1
Ref: 0213-212/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS MODULE
Ref: 0230
1 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
SAIT
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION TRAINER
1
2
SAIT/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION
1
3
SAIT/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
4
BS
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
BASIC UNIT WITH COMPUTER CONTROLLED
INTERFACE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY
OF SENSORS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR
THE STUDY OF SENSORS
VIBRATIONS AND /OR DEFORMATION MODULE
TEMPERATURE MODULE
PRESSURE MODULE
FLOW MODULE
OVENS MODULE
LIQUID LEVEL MODULE
TACHOMETER MODULE
PROXIMITY MODULE
PNEUMATIC MODULE
LIGHT TEST MODULE
BSPC
DAB
BS/CCSOF
BS-1
BS-2
BS-3
BS-4
BS-5
BS-6
BS-7
BS-8
BS-9
BS-10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
BS/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS
1
6
BS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
STUDY OF SENSORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS) OF THE MODULES: BS-1 VIBRATIONS,
BS-2 TEMPERATURE, BS-3 PRESSURE, BS-4 FLOW,
BS-5 OVENS, BS-6 LIQUID LEVEL, BS-7
TACHOMETER, BS-8 PROXIMITY & BS-9 PNEUMATIC
1
7
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
8
EDAS/VIS-0.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
VIS
9
1
0230PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
10
0230PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
11
0230IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
12
0230CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
0230TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
0230MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0230
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
(continuation)
SAIT. Transducers and Instrumentation Trainer
Optional:
EDAS/VIS.
EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Data Acquisition Interface Box
Data
Acquisition
Board
Data Acquisition
and Virtual
Instrumentation
Software
SAIT. Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The SAIT trainer shows didactically the function principles
of the transducers most used in industry. It is divided into
two parts: the lower part, in which all the input and output
transducers are found, while in the upper part, the system
of signal conditioning and those of instrumentation are
found; the electrical and pneumatic power supplies are
housed in its interior.
Input Transducers:
Resistance Transducers for applications in angular or
linear position:
Linearly sliding potentiometer. Rotary carbon-track
potentiometer. Rotary coil potentiometer. Precision
servo- potentiometer. The Wheatstone Bridge circuit.
Applications of temperature:
NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
Thermistors. RTD Sensor (Platinum Transducer with
Temperature dependent Resistance). Temperature
sensor IC “Integrated Circuit LM 335”. Type “K”
Thermocouples.
Applications of light:
Photovoltaic Cell. Phototransistor. Photodiode PIN.
Photoconductive Cell.
Linear position and force:
Linear Variable Differential Transformer LVDT.
Extensiometric Transducer.
Environmental measurements:
Air flow Sensor. Air pressure Sensor. Humidity sensor.
Rotational speed and position control:
Slotted optoelectronic Sensor. Opto-reflective
Sensor. Inductive sensor. Hall effect Sensor.
Permanent D.C. magnet tachogenerator.
Sound measurements:
Dynamical microphone. Ultrasonic receiver.
Visualization Devices:
Timing device/ counter with LED display. Graphic bar
visualizer. Mobile coil voltmeter.
Output Transducers:
Electrical Resistance. Incandescent Lamp.
Applications for the sound output:
Buzzing (Buzzer). Mobile coil loud speaker. Ultrasonic
transmitter.
Applications of linear or angular motion:
D.C. Soleinod. D.C. Relay. Solenoid Valve.
Permanent Magnet D.C. Motor.
Signal Conditioners:
D.C. Amplifiers. A.C. Amplifier. Power Amplifier.
Current Amplifier. Buffers. Inverting Amplifier.
Differential amplifier. V/F and F/V Converters. V/I
and I/V Converters. Full Wave Rectifier. Hysteresis
convertible Comparator. Electronic switch. Oscillator
40 kHz. Filter 40 kHz. Time-constant convertible
Low Pass Filter.
Circuit with Mathematical Operation: Adding
amplifier. Integrator with different time constants.
Differentiator with different time constants.
Instrumentation Amplifier. Circuit SAMPLE & HOLD.
Amplifiers with gain control and offset.
Furthermore it contains a linearly mounted system of a
D.C. motor, tachodynamo, reflective, slotted optosensors to detect the absolute and incremental position.
Cables.
Manuals: 8 manuals supplied.
Dimensions (approx.): 400 x 400 x 300 mm.
Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
electronics/transducerssensors/SAIT.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Basic Control Systems description.
Characteristics of the Control System:
2.- Characteristics of an ON/OFF temperature
control System.
3.- Characteristics of an ON/ OFF Lighting System.
4.- Investigation of the Characteristics of a Positional
Control System.
5. - Proportional Control.
6.- Proportional+Integral Control.
7. - Proportional+DerivateControl.
8. - Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
9. - Characteristics of a Speed Control System.
10.- Operation in Open Loop.
11.- Operation in Closed Loop, Proportional Control.
12.- Proportional+Integral Control.
13.- Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
Display devices:
14.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a meter of
time.
15.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a simple counter.
16.- Application of the Timer/Counter as rev-counter or
frequency-meter.
17.- Characteristics of an L.E.D. bargraph display unit.
18.- Characteristic of a Mobile Coil Meter.
19.- Comparison of Digital, Bargraph and Mobile Coil
meters.
20.- To widen the voltage index of the B. M. meter.
Variable Resistance transducers in angle or linear
arrangement:
21.- Variation of the Output Voltage for a
Potentiometer used as a Position transducer.
22.- The Buffer as compensator for the effect of the load
on the output voltage of a potentiometer.
23.- Servo potentiometer. Variation of the output
voltage with respect to its position.
24.- Measuring the Resistance using a Wheatstone
Bridge Circuit.
25.- Measuring the Voltage using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method1).
26.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages
smaller than the normal available voltage.
27.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages
greater than the normal voltage.
Transducers for Applications of Temperature
Measurement:
28.- Characteristics of an Integrated Temperature Circuit.
29.- Construction of a Digital Thermometer using the
facilities of the TRANSDUCER TRAINER.
30.- Characteristics of a Platinum Temperature
Dependent Resistance (T.D.R.) Transducer.
31.- T h e N . T. C . ( N e g a t i v e Te m p e r a t u r e
coefficient)Thermistor.
32.- Characteristics of an N.T.C. Thermistor
(Resistance measuring method).
33.- Characteristics of the N.T.C. Thermistor used in an
alarm circuit (double thermistor).
34.- Characteristics of a Type “K” Thermocouple.
Transducers for Light Measuring Applications:
35.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
36.- Characteristics of a photo-transistor.
37.- Luminous intensity detector.
38.-The P.I.N. Photodiode.
39.- Characteristics of a P.I.N. Photodiode.
Page 22
Linear Position transducers.
40.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable Differential
Transformer (LVDT).
41.- Characteristics of a Variable Resistance.
42.- Characteristics of a Strain gauge Transducer.
Transducers for Environmental Measurement
Applications:
43.- Characteristics of a air flow transducer.
44.- Characteristics of a pressure sensor.
45.- Characteristics of a humidity sensor.
Rotational Velocity Transducers or Position Measuring
Applications:
46.- Characteristics of a slotted opto-transducers and its
applications for counting and speed measurement.
47.- Characteristics of the reflective optotransducers
and Gray code disk.
48.- Characteristics of an inductive transducer.
49.- Characteristics of a Hall effect transducer.
50.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent magnet
Tachogenerator.
Transducers for Measuring Sound:
51.- Characteristics of a Dynamic Microphone.
52.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic receiver.
Transducers for Sound Output:
53.- Characteristics of the mobile coil loudspeaker.
54.- Characteristics of a Buzzer.
Output Transducer for Linear or Angular Movement:
55.- Characteristics of a D.C. Solenoid.
56.- Characteristics of a D.C. Relay.
57.- Characteristics of a Solenoid air valve.
58.- Characteristics of a Permanent Magnet Motor.
Signal Conditioning Circuits:
59.- Characteristics of the Direct Current amplifiers 1,
2 and x100.
60.- Characteristics of a current amplifier and
application of a buffer amplifier.
61.- Characteristics of Power and Buffer Amplifiers.
62.- Characteristics of an Inverter Amplifier.
63.- Characteristics of a Differential Amplifier.
Signal Converter Circuits:
64.- Characteristics of a Voltage to Current Converter.
65.- Characteristics of a Current to Voltage Converter.
66.-Characteristics of a Voltage to Frequency
Converter.
67.-Characteristics of a Frequency to Voltage
Converter.
68.- Characteristics of a Full Wave Rectifier.
Comparators, Oscillator and Filters:
69.- Characteristics of a Comparator.
70.- Characteristics of an Alarm Oscillator circuit.
71.- Characteristics of an Electronic Switch.
72.- Characteristics of the Oscillator of 40 kHz.
73.- Characteristics of Filters.
Circuits that carry out Mathematical Operations:
74.- Characteristics of a Adding Amplifier.
75.- Characteristics of an Integrator.
76.- Characteristics of a Differentiator Circuit.
77.- Characteristics of a Sample and Hold Circuit.
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
2
1
Test Modules
Base Units:
2
(common for all test modules type “BS”)
(to be used with Base Units)
Test Modules
(to be used with Base Units)
BS6
BS1
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA.
EDIBON Computer Control System
Base
Unit
BS2
Computer
Data Acquisition
Board
(not included
in the supply)
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
BS7
OR
BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
BS3
BS8
BS4
BS9
BS5
Other modules
“BS” System includes a set of electronic components with a twofold purpose: to control the signal produced by the transducers, and to evaluate and quantify it.
Sensors or transducers are common elements in the state of our technology. Therefore this SYSTEM has been developed to show the basic principles of different types
of sensors and their way of processing signals.
This system consists of:
1 Base Unit, to control the system:
Option 1: BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit, including EDIBON Computer Control System. OR
Option 2: BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
2 Test Modules:
BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test
Module.
BS2. Temperature Test Module.
BS3. Pressure Test Module.
BS4.
BS5.
BS6.
BS7.
Flow Test Module.
Ovens Test Module.
Liquid Level Test Module.
Tachometers Test Module.
BS8. Proximity Test Module.
BS9. Pneumatic Test Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 18
(continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
1
Base Units
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System:
Control Interface integrated in the unit box (BSPC). Data acquisition board to be installed in a computer slot.
Computer Control Software.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BSUB. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
2
Test Modules
BS1.Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Test Module has been designed to teach mechanical vibration and
displacement variable measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Extensiometric gauges:
Characteristics: Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W. Gauge factor at 24ºC:
2.120.
Heating resistance and thermocouple:
Resistance to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar.
Thermocouple type “K”. Temperature range:-50ºC to 350ºC.
LVDT Sensor: Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x350 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To measure the vibration of a vibrant girder using
extensiometric gauges.
2.- To use a heating resistance to rise the girder temperature
in order to study the effect on the sensors.(Thermocouple
and heating resistance).
3.- To detect the displacement of the BS1 system vibrant
girder using a LVDT sensor.
4.- Effect of temperature variation on an extensiometric
beam.
5.- Effect of deformation on the resistance of a beam.
6.- Measure of the three deformation dimensions or
deformation of spherical or cylindrical systems.
7.- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) for
measuring displacements.
8.- Analysis of how to compensate the variation of resistance
of a gauge due to temperature variations, using shorted
circuits with compensating gauges.
9.- Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT) as a
weighing system.
10.- Effect on the vibration of a beam with different masses.
BS2.Temperature Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Temperature Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of sensors of temperature as a measure, and its control.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Bimetallic switch sensor: Opening temperature: 50ºC. Closing
Temp.: 30ºC.
Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor:
Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC.
Relay AC: Voltage and current (nominal) :250V-10A. 3 sockets.
Switching voltage: 12 V.
Capillary thermostat: Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
Thermocouples: 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K.
Temperature range: - 50ºC to 250ºC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x335 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to use the Curie effect as application of a high
temperature thermostatic controller.
2.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. To use the bimetallic
thermostat as a temperature control, calculating its
hysteresis.
3.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. How we can reduce the
hysteresis by adding a resistor to the heating circuit.
4.- To use the thermostat based on a bimetallic sensor to
control the temperature.
5.- Capillary thermostatic controller.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 19
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
2
BS3.Pressure Test Module
(continuation)
Test Modules (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Pressure Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of this kind of sensors measurement systems. It shows the
different pressure measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer).
Resistor range: 500 W to 5 KW. Operation force: 200-750g.
LVDT sensor: Sensibility: 780mV/mm. Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc.
Differential pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.
Extensiometric gauges: Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120 W. Gauge
factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical.
Manometric pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Absolute pressure sensor: Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Air Compressor: Air flow: 10 l /min. Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2. Power
supply: 220V, 50/60Hz.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the Test
Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x320 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Use of linear positioning sensor (potentiometer) to detect
the displacement produced by a diaphragm expansion
caused by the air pressure.
2.- Use of a LVDT as an element to measure the diaphragm
distortion that is consequence of the pressure inside the
pressure chamber.
3.- Differential pressure sensor with hole-board system. Use
of a differential pressure sensor of the semiconductor
type to measure the pressure fall in a hole-board system.
4.- Extensiometric Gauges. To detect objects using an
infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
5.- Measure the pressure in the chamber, using two different
types of sensors (manometric and absolute pressure
sensor).
6.- Extensiometric gauges for measuring deformations: their
resistance changes as the diaphragm expands due to the
pressure coming from the pressure container.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS4.Flow Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The objective this module is to show techniques to measure
changeable fluids.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Flow optical sensor:
Power supply: 4.5 to 24 Vdc. Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM.
High resolution optical flow sensor: Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5
l/min.
Underwater pump.
Level sensor by pressure: It is a differential pressure sensor. Pressure
range: 0 to 1psi. Overpressure: 20psi.
Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system): Measurement
range: 0 to 30 psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.
Changeable flow meter: Range:0 -2 l/min.
V narrowing.
Main and secondary tanks.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To measure the water volume produced by an
underwater pump in the module using an optical flow
sensor.
2.- To use a high-resolution optical flow sensor to measure
low volumes.
3.- Level sensor by pressure. To use a differential pressure
sensor to measure the liquid level in one of the tanks.
4.- Differential pressure sensor. To measure the pressure-fall
in the module hole board system, as a necessary
parameter to determine volume.
5.- To measure the flow volume generated by the underwater
pump using a flow meter of changeable area.
6.- To obtain the flow-volume value in the secondary tank
using the V narrowing weir.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS5.Ovens Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
With “BS5” Test Module it is possible to study temperature
measurement techniques using several kinds of sensors placed
inside the sealed place that is used as oven.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Oven chamber.
Heating resistance: Maximum dissipation power of 500W.
Fan: Maximum power: 0.96 W. Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s.
Thermocouples:
4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a
different height. Temperature range: -184 ºC to 400 ºC.
Platinum resistance thermometer:
Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC.
Thermistor:
NTC thermistor. Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW. Temperature
range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
Semiconductor temperature sensor: Reverse polarized diode.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel
of the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x470 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 20
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Heating resistance. Raise the oven internal temperature
over the environmental temperature using a heating
resistance to make tests and practices related with
temperature measurement.
2.- To use a fan as refrigerating element of the oven.
3.- To use thermocouples as temperature sensors elements
inside the oven. Temperature measurement using a
thermocouple.
4.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a platinum
resistance thermometer.
5.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a
thermistor temperature sensor.
6.- Temperature measurement using a thermistor, based on
its negative temperature coefficient.
7.- To obtain the temperature value inside the oven, using a
semiconductor sensor (diode).
8.- PID control.
(continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
2
BS6.Liquid Level Test Module
Test Modules (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Liquid Level Test Module “BS6” has been designed to teach the
use and applications of level sensors and their measurement systems.
This module teaches techniques to measure and control the liquid
level in a tank.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Water tanks. 2 Minipumps: Power supply: 12Vdc (max. voltage).
Nominal current: 1 A DC.
Capacitative level sensor. Pressure level sensor, pressure range: 01psi. Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning
switches. Conduction sensor. Magnetic float level sensor. Optical level
sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x300x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use a capacitative sensor to measure the liquid level in
the tank.
2.- To use the differential pressure sensor as an element to
determine the water level in a tank.
3.- To use a changeable resistance fixed to a float system as a
liquid level measurement element.
4.- Conduction Sensor. Use of a sensor made up of to steel
electrodes to measure the water level of a tank.
5.- Magnetic float level sensor. Detect a precise tank liquid
level with a magnetic switch sensor.
6.- Control the BS6 system left tank liquid level using an
optical level sensor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS7.Tachometers Test Module
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module has been designed to teach linear and angular speed
measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Inductive Sensor: output voltage:
DC Motor: nominal voltage: 12V., resistance: 9,7 Oh., max. vacuum
speed: 8500 r.p.m., max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m., start
voltage: 210mV. DC Tachometer.
Refractive Infrared Sensor. Hall Effect position sensor.
Slot Sensor: Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output
phototransistor are capsulated.
Encoder.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 300x200x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- DC Motor. Provide the group of sensors of the BS7 system
fixed to the central axle of the equipment with movement
power.
2.- DC Tachometer. To use a DC motor as a tachometer to
measure the revolutions of the BS7 system central axle.
3.- Inductive Sensor.
4.- Refractive Infrared Sensor. To measure the central axle
revolutions of the BS7 system using a light reflection
optical sensor.
5.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a slotted
optical sensor through light interruption.
6.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a Hall-effect
position sensor.
7.- To measure the central axle revolutions of the BS7 system
using the encoder.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS8.Proximity Test Module
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Module has been designed to teach techniques to detect the
proximity of objects, focusing on the distance at which each sensor is
able to detect the object and the type of material it can detect.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
DC Motor: Nominal power supply: 12Vdc.
Proximity capacitative sensor, detection distance: 10 mm.
Hall effect sensor.
Infrared sensor by reflection: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Transmission infrared sensor: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Conduction sensor. Inductive sensor: detection distance: 2mm.
Ultrasound sensor: transmitter sensibility: 106 dB., receiver sensibility:
65 dB., resonance frequency: 40kHz.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module. Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- How to use a capacitative sensor to detect metal objects
as the pass in front of the sensor.
2.- To use a Hall effect sensor as an element to detect the
presence of magnetic objects.
3.- Reflection infrared sensor. To use an optical sensor that
works through infrared light reflection.
4.- Infrared sensor by transmission. To detect objects using
an infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
5.- Conduction sensor. To detect magnetic objects using a
REED switch sensor.
6.- To detect the presence of ferrous object using an inductive
sensor.
7.- Ultrasound sensor. To detect metallic and non-metallic
object using high frequency sounds.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS9.Pneumatic Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Pneumatics Test Module “BS9” has been designed to teach
techniques of control and handling of a pneumatic piston.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Proportional valve 1 and 2: Nominal voltage: 24Vdc, pressure range:
8 bar max., 0 to 6 bar control. Pneumatic switch: max. pressure: 6
bars. Regulation filter: manual drainage, max. input pressure: 8 bars.
Differential pressure sensor: measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. LVDT
Sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-
2.-
3.4.-
Proportional valves. To control electronically the vertical
displacement of a double effect pneumatic piston using
proportional valves.
Differential pressure sensor. To use a pressure sensor for
measuring the pressure difference between both
pneumatic piston air inlets.
Pneumatic switch. To deflect the air flow in the BS9 system
using a pneumatic switch.
LVDT Linear Displacement Sensor. To measure pneumatic
piston displacement using an excitation and DC output
LVDT.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 21
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
issue:01/11
ENERGY: ADVANCED POWER PLANT SIMULATOR. ADVANCED MODULE
Ref: 0522
1 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
APS12
ADVANCED ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM AND POWER
PLANTS SIMULATOR(GENERATION,
TRANSFORMATION, TRANSPORT, DISTRIBUTION AND
CONSUMPTION), FORMED BY:
1
1
H2
HUB II - POWER PLANT ENERGY SYSTEM (ONE
POWER PLANT SYSTEM SIMULATION SOFTWARE
REQUIRED) WITH PROPER SCADA II
1
2
'
1
PPE/CC
PPE/NU
PPE/FD
PPE/FF
PPE/GA
PPE/HY
PPE/WP
PPE/FV
PPE/HE
PPE/BM
PPE/FC
PPE/GT
AVAILABLE POWER PLANT ENERGY SYSTEMS
SIMULATION SOFTWARES, FOR WORKING WITH HUB
II (H2):
COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANT.
NUCLEAR POWER PLANT
DIESEL FUEL POWER PLANT.
FOSSIL FUEL (COALS) POWER PLANT.
GAS POWER PLANT
HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT.
WIND POWERED POWER PLANT.
PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER PLANT.
HELIOTHERMIC POWER PLANT
BIOMASS POWER PLANT.
FUEL CELLS POWER PLANT.
GEOTHERMAL POWER PLANT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
0522PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
13
0522PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
14
0522IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
15
0522CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
16
0522TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
17
0522MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0522
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.2- Energy Power Plants
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included)
PSS12: Complete Configuration (14 Units).
1AG1. Generator Unit
3AT3.
Power
Transformer
4AL4.
Substation and
Lines Cubicle
5AC5.
Loads and Network
Equivalents Cubicle
8BCE1.
Electric Control Desk
6BEN1.
Electric Control Board 1
(Energy Generation)
7BEL1.
Electric Control Board 2
(Transformation and Lines)
5.- Energy
Basic Configuration = Mini PSS12. Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption (7 Units).
2AG2.
Generator and Auxiliary
Services Cubicle
9BPR2.
Electric Control Board 3
(Spare)
11CEP1.
Energy Control Desk
with SCADA System
included
10CVW1.Videowall
12DAD1./13DAD2./14DAD3.
Control Boards (slides)
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/energypowerplants/PSS12.pdf
Page 75
www.edibon.com
5.2- Energy Power Plants
(continuation)
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included) (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
SOME PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
General Possibilities
Example for Hydroelectric Power Plant:
Experiments for Simulator Knowledge:
EXPERIMENTS FOR SIMULATOR KNOWLEDGE (ESK)
ESK 1. Simulated Hydroelectric Power Station.
1) Specific study of Simulator behaviour.
1.1. General description.
1.2. Layout.
! The selection of one type of Power Plant or another one will make the
1.3.
Main wiring diagram.
system to behave according to a specific simulation.
1.4.
One-line electrical schema.
! The Simulator carries out a complex mathematical modelling that will
1.5. Mosaic type structure diagrams.
allow studying the real behaviour of the Power Plant during the primary
1.6. Unit Steady States (USS).
energy conversion.
1.7. Procedures for Unit Starting (PUS) and Shut Down (PUD).
! All Power Plant parameters can be edited allowing to modify and
1.8. Electrical and Hydraulics conditions for USS ,PUS and PUD.
1.9. Operation modes.
adequate to specific Power Plants cases. For example, in the Hydroelectric
ESK 2-6. Overall presentation of simulation models:
type: rain amount, affluents, pipes, bumpy textures, etc.
ESK 2. Model of the Energy Conversion in a Hydroelectric Power Station.
ESK 3. Model of Generation Unit and Auxiliary Services.
2) Power Plant Control. All procedures.
ESK 4. Model of Main Transformer, Substation and Interconnection Lines.
! Each different starting, operation and stop procedures belongs to each
ESK 5. Model of Loads and Network Equivalent.
specific Power Plant.
ESK 6. Model of Control Room.
! During the process there will appear some images of real Power Plants ESK 7-22. Operation instructions for the different parts of the Equipment:
ESK 7. Operations from Hydraulic Control Boards.
while an animated simulation will show how our Power Plant works.
ESK 8-10. Operations from Hydraulic Control Desk:
! It shows the real procedures that happens in a real Power Plant.
ESK 8. Software operations on Hydraulic Control Desk:
-Circuit Breaker Faults
3) Possibility to use different types of Power Plants at the same time.
-Alarms
! Apart from the particular study of each type of Power Plant and the
-……….
ESK 9. Operation of Generator Excitation System from Hydraulic Control Desk.
operation (generation) synchronized with the national electrical network,
ESK
10.
Operation
of Power Electronic Converter from Hydraulic Control Desk.
the simulator allows an interconnection between different types of Power
ESK 11-12. Operations from Electric Control Boards:
Plants. This will allow a real Network Simulation, studying the figure of
ESK 11. Operations of the protective relays.
system operator and regulating the combined operation of the different
ESK 12. Other operations on the Electric Control Boards.
Power Plants types.
ESK 13-14. Operations from Electric Control Desk:
ESK 13. Control and signalling of switchgear, taking into account interlockings.
ESK 14. Generator frequency and voltage adjustments.
Main Target
ESK 15. Generator Unit.
ESK 16-17. Operations on Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle:
! The main target of this Simulator is to train technical students, workers and
ESK 16. Measurements of generator and auxiliary services quantities.
even teachers, in how the Energy can be generated, transformed, transported,
ESK 17.Location and type of fault selection for Synchronous generator protection
distributed and how it can be consumed.
system.
! Additionally PSS12 allows to simulate all the procedures carried out in real
ESK 18. Power transformer.
power plant to star up the generation plant, to run it and to connect it to the
ESK 19-20. Operations on Substation and Lines Cubicle
National grid (Electrical Network), etc.
ESK 19. Adjustment of lines 1 and 2 lengths.
ESK 20. Location and fault type selection on lines 1 and 2.
ESK 21-22. Operations from Loads and Network Equivalents Cubicle
ESK 21. Type and level of load selection.
Structure of the Complete Simulator
ESK 22. Network equivalents selection.
ESK 23. Videowall.
The Complete Simulator is formed by two main parts, the first part (a) with 14
Experiments for Operational Simulation:
Units and the second one (b) the Simulation with Generation System Software Unit starting and shutdown procedures (EOS 1-17)
EOS 1-14. Starting procedures.
(Hybrid System).
Starting unit to running in island- PUS 12
EOS 1. Manual starting.
a) Small Scale Electric Power System:
EOS 2. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
This Small Scale Electric Power System consists of 14 different units (1AG1
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1- PUS 13.
Generator Unit, 2AG2 Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle, 3AT3
EOS 3. Manual starting.
Power Transformer, 4AL4 Substation and Lines Cubicle, 5AC5 Loads and
EOS 4. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.2
Network Equivalents Cubicle, 6BEN1 Electric Control Board 1 (energy
EOS 5. Manual starting.
generation), 7BEL1 Electric Control Board 2 (transformation and lines),
EOS 6. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
8BCE1 Electric Control Board 3 (spare), 9BPR2 Electric Control Desk,
Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.3
10CVW1 Videowall, 11CEP1 Energy Control Desk, 12DAD1-13DAD2EOS 7. Manual starting.
14DAD3 Control Boards (slides)).
EOS 8. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 1- PUS 14.1
This Complete Simulator is built with the same devices as those used in the
EOS 9. Manual starting.
EOS 10. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
real Power Plants. Therefore the system reproduces at small scale the
Starting
unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 2- PUS 14.2
functioning of a real Power System.
EOS 11. Manual starting.
EOS 12. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Not only the steps for starting a Power Plant, but many faults can be
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Lines 1 and 2- PUS 14.3
simulated.
EOS 13. Manual starting.
EOS 14. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
EOS 15-17. Shutdown procedures
b) Software Packages:
Normal shutdown PUD-N
8 Software Packages, which allow to simulate 8 different Electric Power
EOS 15. Manual shutdown.
Plants, as follow:
EOS 16. Guide-operator and automatic shutdown.
! Nuclear Power Station (ref. CN).
Emergency shutdown PUD-E
! Diesel Thermal Station (ref. CTD).
EOS 17. Emergency shutdown
! Fossil Fuel Thermal Station (ref. CTCF).
Unit operating in normal regime (EOS 18- 58)
EOS 18-29. Unit feeding isolated loads with automatic frequency control and voltage
! Combined Cycle Thermal Station (ref. CTCC).
adjustment at remote substation busbars.
! Hydroelectric Station (ref. CHD).
Through Line 1 (USS 4.1)
! Wind-powered Station (ref. CE).
EOS 18. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure resistive loads.
! Photovoltaic Solar Station (ref. CSFV).
EOS 19. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure inductive loads.
! Heliothermic Solar Station (ref. CHST).
EOS 20. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure capacitive loads.
EOS 21. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different mixed loads.
Through
Line 2 (USS 4.2)
H and anyone requested by the customer.
EOS 22. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure resistive loads.
EOS 23. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure inductive loads.
This is an Hybrid System as combines hardware and software using the proper
EOS 24. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure capacitive loads.
mathematics models.
EOS 25. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different mixed loads.
Through Lines 1 and 2 (USS 4.3)
The final configuration of the Complete Simulator will be formed by:
EOS 26.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure resistive
1) One small scale Electric Power System.
loads.
2) At least, one of the eight Software Packages mentioned above. The
EOS 27.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure inductive
customer will decide which (any or all of them) of the software packages
loads.
wants to buy.
EOS 28. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure capacitive
loads.
EOS 29. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different mixed loads.
c) SCADA System. This unit uses a control and acquisition system (SCADA)
EOS
30-33.
Unit
feeding isolated loads through Line 2 (USS 4.2) with automatic frequency
in both versions MINI PSS12 and PSS12.
control and voltage adjustment at substation bars.
EOS 30. Determine voltage drop through main transformer with different pure resistive
loads.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
...Etc. (See PSS12 catalogue)
units/energy/energypowerplants/PSS12.pdf
5.- Energy
Differences between Simulators of the different Power Plants:
Page 76
issue:01/11
FUEL CELLS. RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0532/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EC5C
EC5C.Unit
EC5C/CIB
DAB
EC5C/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PEM FUEL CELL UNIT,
FORMED BY:
PEM FUEL CELL UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX PEM FUEL CELL UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PEM FUEL CELL UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EC5C/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR PEM
FUEL CELL (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
3
EC5C/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PEM FUEL CELL UNIT
10
4
EC6C
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PEM FUEL CELL ADVANCED
UNIT, FORMED BY:
PEM FUEL CELL ADVANCED UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PEM FUEL CELL
ADVANCED UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PEM FUEL ADVANCED
CELL UNIT
1
EC6C.Unit
EC6C/CIB
DAB
EC6C/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
EC6C/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR PEM
FUEL ADVANCED CELL (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
6
EC6C/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PEM FUEL CELL ADVANCED
UNIT
10
7
EA5C
COMPUTER CONTROLLED ALKALINE FUEL CELL
UNIT, FORMED BY:
ALKALINE FUEL CELL UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR ALKALINE FUEL
CELL UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR ALKALINE FUEL CELL
UNIT
1
EA5C.Unit
EA5C/CIB
DAB
EA5C/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
EA5C/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ALKALINE FUEL CELL UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
9
EA5C/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED ALKALINE FUEL CELL UNIT
10
10
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
11
0532PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
12
0532PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
13
0532IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
14
0532CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
15
0532TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
Ref: 0532/10S
ITEM
16
2 / 2
REFERENCE
0532MANU
DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
QTY.
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Renewable (Alternative) Energies
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en
†Solar Thermal
EESTC. Computer Controlled Thermal Solar Energy Unit
MINI-EESTC. Computer Controlled Thermal Solar Energy N
EW
Basic Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
4
3
2
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
CONTROL
1 Unit: MINI-EESTC. Thermal Solar Energy Basic Unit
1
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EESTC. Thermal Solar Energy Unit
5.- Energy
ET5C. Computer Controlled Thermal Solar Energy NEW
Concentrator Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: ET5C. Thermal Solar Energy Concentrator Unit
†Wind
EEEC. Computer Controlled Wind Energy Unit
MINI-EEEC. Computer Controlled Wind Energy Basic Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA.
EDIBON Computer Control System
4
3
2
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
3
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
CONTROL
6 Manuals
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
CONTROL
1 Unit: MINI-EEEC. Wind Energy Basic Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EEEC. Wind Energy Unit
†Fuel Cells
EC5C. Computer Controlled PEM Fuel Cell Unit (22 Watt)
NE
W
EC6C. Computer Controlled PEM Fuel Cell Advanced Unit
(1.5 kW)
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
2
Unit: EC5C. PEM Fuel Cell Unit (22 Watt)
4
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
3
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
NE
W
CONTROL
1
Unit: EC6C. PEM Fuel Cell Advanced Unit (1.5 kW)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
NE
W
EA5C. Computer Controlled Alkaline Fuel Cell Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
1
Unit: EA5C. Alkaline Fuel Cell Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Non computer controlled version available too.
Page 29
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0532/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EC5C/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PEM FUEL CELL UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
EC6C/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PEM FUEL CELL
ADVANCED UNIT
1
1
3
PLC-PI
EA5C/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR ALKALINE FUEL CELL
UNITT
1
1
4
0532PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
5
0532PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
6
0532IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
7
0532CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
8
0532TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
9
0532MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
BIO. RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0533/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EBDC
EBDC.Unit
EBDC/CIB
DAB
EBDC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIODIESEL PROCESS UNIT,
FORMED BY:
BIODIESEL PROCESS UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BIODIESEL PROCESS
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BIODIESEL PROCESS
UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EBDC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIODIESEL PROCESS UNIT
10
3
EBDC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIODIESEL PROCESS UNIT
10
4
EBEC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIOETHANOL PROCESS
UNIT, FORMED BY:
BIOETHANOL PROCESS UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BIOETHANOL
PROCESS UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BIOETHANOL PROCESS
UNIT
1
EBEC.Unit
EBEC/CIB
DAB
EBEC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
EBEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
BIOETHANOL PROCESS UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
6
EBEC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIOETHANOL PROCESS UNIT
10
7
EBGC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIOGAS PROCESS UNIT,
FORMED BY:
BIOGAS PROCESS UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BIOGAS PROCESS
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BIOGAS PROCESS UNIT
1
EBGC.Unit
EBGC/CIB
DAB
EBGC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
EBGC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BIOGAS
PROCESS UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
9
EBGC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIOGAS PROCESS UNIT
10
EBMC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIOMASS PROCESS UNIT,
FORMED BY:
BIOMASS PROCESS UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BIOMASS PROCESS
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BIOMASS PROCESS UNIT
1
10
EBMC.Unit
EBMC/CIB
DAB
EBMC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
Ref: 0533/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
11
EBMC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
BIOMASS PROCESS UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
12
EBMC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BIOMASS PROCESS UNIT
10
13
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
14
0533PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
15
0533PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
16
0533IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
17
0533CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
18
0533TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
19
0533MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Renewable (Alternative) Energies
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en
†Bio
EBDC. Computer Controlled Biodiesel Process Unit
EBEC. Computer Controlled Bioethanol Process Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
4
3
2
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
5.- Energy
1
Unit: EBEC. Bioethanol Process Unit
Unit: EBDC. Biodiesel Process Unit
NE
W
EBGC. Computer Controlled Biogas Process Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
PID CONTROL
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
1
NE
W
EBMC. Computer Controlled Biomass Process Unit
Unit: EBMC. Biomass Process Unit
Unit: EBGC. Biogas Process Unit
†Sea
EOMC. Computer Controlled Waves Energy Unit
EMMC. Computer Controlled Tidal Energy Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
CONTROL
1
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: EMMC. Tidal Energy Unit
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EOMC. Waves Energy Unit
ECMC. Computer Controlled Submarine Currents Energy
NE
Unit
W
ETMC. Computer Controlled Ocean Thermal Energy Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
1
NE
W
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
1
CONTROL
Unit: ECMC. Submarine Currents Energy Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Non computer controlled version available too.
www.edibon.com
Unit: ETMC. Ocean Thermal Energy Unit
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
Page 30
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0533/PLC
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EBDC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR BIODIESEL PROCESS
UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
EBEC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR BIOETHANOL PROCESS
UNIT
1
1
3
PLC-PI
EBGC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR BIOGAS PROCESS UNIT
1
1
4
PLC-PI
EBMC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR BIOMASS PROCESS
UNIT
1
1
5
0533PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0533PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0533IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
8
0533CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0533TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0533MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0533/PLC
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
SEA. RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0534/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EOMC
EOMC.Unit
EOMC/CIB
DAB
EOMC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROL WAVES ENERGY UNIT, FORMED
BY:
WAVES ENERGY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR WAVES ENERGY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR WAVES ENERGY UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EOMC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR WAVES
ENERGY (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
EOMC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROL WAVES ENERGY UNIT
10
4
EMMC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED TIDAL ENERGY UNIT,
FORMED BY:
TIDAL ENERGY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX TIDAL ENERGY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE TIDAL ENERGY UNIT
1
EMMC.Unit
EMMC/CIB
DAB
EMMC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
EMMC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR TIDAL
ENERGY (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
6
EMMC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED TIDAL ENERGY UNIT
10
7
ECMC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED SUBMARINE CURRENTS
ENERGY UNIT, FORMED BY:
SUBMARINE CURRENTS ENERGY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX SUBMARINE CURRENTS
ENERGY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR SUBMARINE CURRENTS
ENERGY UNIT
1
ECMC.Unit
ECMC/CIB
DAB
ECMC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
ECMC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SUBMARINE CURRENTS ENERGY (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
9
ECMC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED SUBMARINE CURRENTS
ENERGY UNIT
10
ETMC
COMPUTER CONTROL OCEAN THERMAL ENERGY UNIT,
FORMED BY:
OCEAN THERMAL ENERGY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR OCEAN THERMAL
ENERGY UNIT
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR OCEAN THERMAL
ENERGY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
1
10
ETMC.Unit
ETMC/CIB
ETMC/CCSOF
DAB
11
ETMC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR OCEAN
THERMAL ENERGY UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
1
1
1
10
Ref: 0534/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
12
ETMC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROL OCEAN THERMAL ENERGY UNIT
10
13
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
14
0534PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
15
0534PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
16
0534IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
17
0534CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
18
0534TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
19
0534MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Renewable (Alternative) Energies
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en
†Bio
EBDC. Computer Controlled Biodiesel Process Unit
EBEC. Computer Controlled Bioethanol Process Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
4
3
2
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
5.- Energy
1
Unit: EBEC. Bioethanol Process Unit
Unit: EBDC. Biodiesel Process Unit
NE
W
EBGC. Computer Controlled Biogas Process Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
PID CONTROL
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
1
NE
W
EBMC. Computer Controlled Biomass Process Unit
Unit: EBMC. Biomass Process Unit
Unit: EBGC. Biogas Process Unit
†Sea
EOMC. Computer Controlled Waves Energy Unit
EMMC. Computer Controlled Tidal Energy Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
CONTROL
1
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: EMMC. Tidal Energy Unit
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EOMC. Waves Energy Unit
ECMC. Computer Controlled Submarine Currents Energy
NE
Unit
W
ETMC. Computer Controlled Ocean Thermal Energy Unit
NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
1
NE
W
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
1
CONTROL
Unit: ECMC. Submarine Currents Energy Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Non computer controlled version available too.
www.edibon.com
Unit: ETMC. Ocean Thermal Energy Unit
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
Page 30
issue:01/11
GEOTHERMAL. RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0535/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EG5C
EG5C.Unit
EG5C/CIB
DAB
EG5C/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GEOTHERMAL (LOW
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT, FORMED BY:
GEOTHERMAL (LOW ENTHALPY) ENERGY EQUIPMENT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR GEOTHERMAL (LOW
ENTHALPY) ENERGY EQUIPMENT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GEOTHERMAL (LOW
ENTHALPY) ENERGY EQUIPMENT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EG5C/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
GEOTHERMAL (LOW ENTHALPY) ENERGY (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
EG5C/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GEOTHERMAL (LOW
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
10
4
EG6C
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GEOTHERMAL (HIGH
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT, FORMED BY:
GEOTHERMAL (HIGH ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR GEOTHERMAL (HIGH
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GEOTHERMAL (HIGH
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
1
EG6C.Unit
EG6C/CIB
DAB
EG6C/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
EG6C/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
GEOTHERMAL (HIGH ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
6
EG6C/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GEOTHERMAL (HIGH
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
10
7
THBLLC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED HEAT PUMP UNIT (WATER
CONDENSER AND WATER EVAPORATOR), FORMED BY:
HEAT PUMP UNIT (WATER CONDENSER AND WATER
EVAPORATOR)
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX HEAT PUMP UNIT (WATER
CONDENSER AND WATER EVAPORATOR)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR HEAT PUMP UNIT
(WATER CONDENSER AND WATER EVAPORATOR)
1
THBLLC.Unit
THBLLC/CIB
DAB
THBLLC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
THBLLC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HEAT
PUMP UNIT (WATER CONDENSER AND WATER
EVAPORATOR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
9
THBLLC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED HEAT PUMP UNIT (WATER
CONDENSER AND WATER EVAPORATOR)
10
10
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
11
0535PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
Ref: 0535/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
12
0535PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
13
0535IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
14
0535CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
15
0535TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
16
0535MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Renewable (Alternative) Energies
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en
†Geothermal
EG5C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) N
EW
Energy Unit
EG3C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) N
EW
Energy Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EG5C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
1
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
EG1C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) NE
W
Energy Unit
Unit: EG3C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
EG6C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (high enthalpy)
NE
Energy Unit
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
6 Manuals
1
Unit: EG6C. Geothermal (high enthalpy) Energy Unit
CONTROL
1
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5.- Energy
2
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EG1C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
†Hidro
SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and
Regulation Simulator
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Data
Acquisition
Board
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
Simulator
†Organic
TORC. Computer Controlled Organic Rankine Cycle Unit NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TORC. Organic Rankine Cycle Unit
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Other available Units:
NE
W
-EFTEC. Computer Controlled Turbine Electric Hub
Troubleshooting Learning System
-EFTNC.Computer Controlled Turbine Nacelle
Troubleshooting Learning System
5.4- Relays Units
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=relaysunits&lang=en
Available Unit:
-ERP. Protection Relay Test (see page 25)
Non computer controlled version available too.
Page 31
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0535/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EG5C/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR GEOTHERMAL (LOW
ENTHALPY) ENERGY EQUIPMENT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
THBLLC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HEAT PUMP UNIT
(WATER CONDENSER AND WATER EVAPORATOR)
1
1
3
PLC-PI
EG6C/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR GEOTHERMAL (HIGH
ENTHALPY) ENERGY UNIT
1
1
4
0535PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
5
0535PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
6
0535IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
7
0535CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
8
0535TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
9
0535MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HIDRO. RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0536/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
SCE
SCE.Unit
DAB
SCE/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GENERATIONS STATIONS
CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR, FORMED BY:
GENERATIONS STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION
SIMULATOR
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GENERATIONS
STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
SCE/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
GENERATING STATIONS CONTROL SIMULATOR
(SYSTEMS ENGINEERING) (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
SCE/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
GENERATIONS STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION
SIMULATOR
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0536PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0536PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0536IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
8
0536CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0536TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0536MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0536/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Renewable (Alternative) Energies
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en
†Geothermal
EG5C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) N
EW
Energy Unit
EG3C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) N
EW
Energy Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EG5C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
1
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
EG1C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) NE
W
Energy Unit
Unit: EG3C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
EG6C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (high enthalpy)
NE
Energy Unit
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
6 Manuals
1
Unit: EG6C. Geothermal (high enthalpy) Energy Unit
CONTROL
1
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5.- Energy
2
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EG1C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
†Hidro
SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and
Regulation Simulator
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Data
Acquisition
Board
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
Simulator
†Organic
TORC. Computer Controlled Organic Rankine Cycle Unit NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TORC. Organic Rankine Cycle Unit
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Other available Units:
NE
W
-EFTEC. Computer Controlled Turbine Electric Hub
Troubleshooting Learning System
-EFTNC.Computer Controlled Turbine Nacelle
Troubleshooting Learning System
5.4- Relays Units
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=relaysunits&lang=en
Available Unit:
-ERP. Protection Relay Test (see page 25)
Non computer controlled version available too.
Page 31
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC's MODULE
Ref: 0536/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
SCE/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR GENERATIONS
STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR
1
1
2
0536PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0536PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0536IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
5
0536CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0536TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0536MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
ORGANIC. RENEWABLE ENERGIES (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0537/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TORC
TORC.Unit
TORC/CIB
DAB
TORC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED ORGANIC RANKINE CYCLE
UNIT, FORMED BY:
ORGANIC RANKINE CYCLE UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX ORGANIC RANKINE CYCLE
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR ORGANIC RANKINE
CYCLE UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
TORC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ORGANIC RANKINE CYCLE UNIT
10
3
TORC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED ORGANIC RANKINE CYCLE
UNIT
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0537PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0537PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0537IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
8
0537CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0537TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0537MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0537/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
5.3- Renewable (Alternative) Energies
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en
†Geothermal
EG5C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) N
EW
Energy Unit
EG3C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) N
EW
Energy Unit
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EG5C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
1
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
EG1C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (low enthalpy) NE
W
Energy Unit
Unit: EG3C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
EG6C. Computer Controlled Geothermal (high enthalpy)
NE
Energy Unit
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
CONTROL
6 Manuals
1
Unit: EG6C. Geothermal (high enthalpy) Energy Unit
CONTROL
1
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5.- Energy
2
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: EG1C. Geothermal (low enthalpy) Energy Unit
†Hidro
SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and
Regulation Simulator
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Data
Acquisition
Board
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
Simulator
†Organic
TORC. Computer Controlled Organic Rankine Cycle Unit NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TORC. Organic Rankine Cycle Unit
PID CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Other available Units:
NE
W
-EFTEC. Computer Controlled Turbine Electric Hub
Troubleshooting Learning System
-EFTNC.Computer Controlled Turbine Nacelle
Troubleshooting Learning System
5.4- Relays Units
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=relaysunits&lang=en
Available Unit:
-ERP. Protection Relay Test (see page 25)
Non computer controlled version available too.
Page 31
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC's MODULE
Ref: 0537/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TORC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR ORGANIC RANKINE
CYCLE UNIT
1
1
2
0537PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0537PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0537IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
5
0537CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0537TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0537MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
TURBINE TROUBLESHOOTING (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0538/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EFTEC
EFTEC.Unit
EFTEC/CIB
DAB
EFTEC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED TURBINE ELECTRIC HUB
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM, FORMED BY:
TURBINE ELECTRIC HUB TROUBLESHOOTING
LEARNING SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX TURBINE ELECTRIC HUB
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TURBINE ELECTRIC
HUB TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EFTEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TURBINE ELECTRIC HUB TROUBLESHOOTING
LEARNING SYSTEM
10
3
EFTEC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED TURBINE ELECTRIC HUB
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
EFTNC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED TURBINE NACELLE
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM, FORMED BY:
TURBINE NACELLE TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING
SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX TURBINE NACELLE
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TURBINE NACELLE
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
1
EFTNC.Unit
EFTNC/CIB
DAB
EFTNC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
6
EFTNC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TURBINE NACELLE TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING
SYSTEM
10
7
EFTNC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED TURBINE NACELLE
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
10
8
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
9
0538PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
10
0538PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
11
0538IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
12
0538CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
0538TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
0538MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0538/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0538/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EFTEC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR TURBINE ELECTRIC
HUB TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
1
1
2
PLC-PI
EFTNC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR TURBINE NACELLE
TROUBLESHOOTING LEARNING SYSTEM
1
1
3
0538PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0538PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
0538IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
6
0538CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0538TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0538MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS MODULE
Ref: 0650
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
SCE
SCE.Unit
DAB
SCE/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED GENERATIONS STATIONS
CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR, FORMED BY:
GENERATIONS STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION
SIMULATOR
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GENERATIONS
STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR
QTY.
1
1
1
1
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
GENERATING STATIONS CONTROL SIMULATOR
(SYSTEMS ENGINEERING) (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
SBB
BALL-BEAM SYSTEM
1
SBB/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BALLBEAM SYSTEM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
CPVM
POSITION CONTROL ANS "DC" MOTOR
1
CPVM/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
POSITION CONTROL AND DC MOTOR (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
7
0650PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
8
0650PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
9
0650IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
10
0650CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
11
0650TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
12
0650MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
2
SCE/CAL
3
4
5
6
Ref: 0650
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.1- Systems
SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and Regulation Simulator (Systems Engineering)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
Data
Acquisition
Board
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
1
Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
Simulator (System Engineering), including
control interface
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
SCE Unit:
Unit designed to simulate the regulation behaviour of a hydroelectric generating station ,as
a didactic application with different aspects of regulation, control and simulation.
Anodized aluminum structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the of
the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
It is possible to work with this unit in 2 ways:
REAL mode (continuous or transient analysis).
SIMULATED mode.
The unit consists mainly of an interface for the conditioning of input and output signals.
For its part, this one will be connected to the computer (through a SCSI wire and a data
acquisition board) and to the two subsystems that we try to control:
Gate subsystem.
Turbine-generator subsystem.
The unit has (in the interface) some switches to establish different loads to the generator output
and different conditions of the real system.
Gate subsystem:
It consists of a motor that controls the gate opening, and some mechanisms that
emulate it.
Turbine-generator system:
This subsystem will be analyzed separately or linked up with the
previous one, achieving that the motor that simulates the turbine turns according to the
gate opening percentage.
This turbine is connected with a generator system and with a system that simulates different
loads (inductive, capacitive or resistive).
Three loads in parallel are connected at the generator output, that simulate the
consumption of the energy distribution system: Variable resistance. Capacitance.
Inductance.
Control interface.
2 SCE/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage
of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the
registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
This Software has got 2 operating modes:
REAL mode: through motors, actuators and sensors that the unit includes (Continuous,
transient).
SIMULATED mode: through the mathematical modelization of the motors, previously
mentioned.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 500x450x200 mm. Weight: 25 Kg.
6.- Systems & Automatics
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/
1.- Modelization of the motor
as a standard motor.
2.- Modelization of the motor
with the constants corrections
of the mathematical model.
3.- Calculation of the dynamos
speed constant.
4.- Obtaining of the transient
responses of the gate
motor.
5.- Obtaining of the transient
response of the turbine
motor.
6.- Obtaining of the transient
response of the gate
simulated motor.
7.- Obtaining of the transient
response of the turbine
simulated motor.
8.- C o m p a r a t i v e a n a l y s i s
between the responses
of the practices 4,5,6,
and 7.
9.- Comparative analysis
the transient response
the turbine real motor
the transient response
the simulated motor
resistive load.
of
of
vs
of
for
11.- Comparative analysis of
transient response of
turbine real motor vs
transient response of
simulated motor
inductive load.
12.- Comparative analysis of
the response response of
the gate real motor vs the
response of the gate
simulated motor for
continuous control signals.
13.- Comparative analysis of the
response of the gate real
motor vs the response of the
gate simulated motor for
sinusoidal control signals.
14.- Comparative analysis of the
response of the gate real
motor vs the response
of the gate simulated motor
for square control signals.
15.- Comparative analysis of the
response of the gate real
motor vs the response of the
gate simulated motor for
triangular control signals.
10.-Comparative analysis of
the transient response of the
turbine real motor v s t h e
transient response of the
simulated motor for
capacitive load.
systems/SCE.pdf
SBB. Ball and Beam System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit for the study of the stabilization of a naturally unstable system, and
control of the position of the ball.
The system allows to place a ball moving along a guide, oscillating from the
central point, at any desired point of the guide.
Self-contained unit with direct connection to the main, and with interface
with other systems through terminals, to connect the inputs and outputs.
All power and electronics measurements inside de unit.
Possibility to use an analogical or digital controller.
The unit includes:
DC motor with gear box, and armature controlled, that alllows the
oscillating movement of the guide adjusted to the motor axis.
Rod with guide for ball displacement and Ball.
Ball position sensor in the guide, rod inclination angle (potentiometer) and
motor speed (tachometric dynamo).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/automationsystems/systems/SBB.pdf
CPVM. DC Motor Position and Speed Control
Page 84
the
the
the
the
for
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
issue:01/11
MECHANICS. BASIC MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0710/10S
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIMEBA
BASIC MECHANICS INTEGRATED LABORATORY,
FORMED BY:
1
MECA1
STATICS EXPERIMENTS MODULE
1
2
MECA1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
STATICS EXPERIMENTS
10
3
MECA1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
STATICS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
4
MECA2
LOAD ELEVATION MECHANISMS MODULE
1
5
MECA2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF LOAD
ELEVATION MECHANISMS
10
6
MECA2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LOAD
ELEVATION MECHANISMS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
MECA3
TRANSMISSIONS MODULE
1
8
MECA3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
TRANSMISSIONS
10
9
MECA3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TRANSMISSIONS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
10
MECA4
DINAMICS MODULE
1
11
MECA4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DYNAMICS
10
12
MECA4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DYNAMICS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
13
MECA5
FRICTION MODULE
1
14
MECA5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FRICTION
10
15
MECA5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
FRICTION EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
16
MECA6
SPECIAL MECHANISMS MODULE
1
17
MECA6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SPECIAL MECHANISMS
10
18
MECA6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SPECIAL MECHANISMS EXPERIMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
19
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
20
0710PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
21
0710PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
22
0710IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
23
0710CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
24
0710TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
Ref: 0710/10S
ITEM
25
2 / 2
REFERENCE
0710MANU
DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
QTY.
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
1
2
Modules
Base Panel
2
(support for the elements of the modules)
Modules
(MECA1)
(MECA4)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
INS/SOF.
(MECA2)
Instructor Software
(MECA5)
+
MECA../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
LIMEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Teaching
Technique
used
(MECA3)
(MECA6)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 4 but any part can be supplied individually or additionally to others.
(Base Panel + Module/s is the minimum supply).
Some Available Modules
- MECA1. Statics Experiments.
- MECA4. Dynamics Experiments.
- MECA2. Load Elevation Mechanisms Experiments.
- MECA5. Friction Experiments.
- MECA3. Transmissions Experiments.
- MECA6. Special Mechanisms Experiments.
LIMEBA consists on a complete set of exercises and practical experiments belonging to the area of Applied Mechanics in its two main subareas: Statics (the
analysis of structures in balance) and Dynamics (analysis of the motion of mechanisms). LIMEBA is divided into various experimental modules, each one
presenting a subject of Statics or Dynamics.
Students are expected to build the experiments on the base panel, where distance measurements are possible due to equidistant spacings between holes on the
base panel.
Thanks to the Manuals and the necessary theoretical knowledge imparted by the teacher, students shall be able to do all the measurements.
The MECA series is split up into six parts, named Modules, each of which contains the elements needed for completing a specific group of related exercises and
experiments.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.1- Basic Mechanics
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.1- Basic Mechanics
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Base Panel
1
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
It is the supporting structure where the modules’s elements are mounted in order to undertake the experiments and hence, the
base panel is necessary along with any module.
The panel is pierced with equidistant holes that help students to take measurements.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Front Panel in painted steel.
The holes on the base panel are accurately spaced at 25mm centres.
Dimensions (approx.): 950 x 400 x 550 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
2
Modules
Each module is formed by different experiment components and is packed in a high quality case.
The experimental elements of each module are made out of special anodized aluminium, a high quality material to achieve total precision and to obtain 100% accuracy in
carried out practices.
Manuals include laboratory sheets for every experiment, listing the elements needed in every experiment and giving the correct position of each element on the base panel.
These sheets also give valuable guidance on how to conduct the experiments and recording the results.
There is a particular manual for each Module (8 manuals normally supplied).
MECA1. Statics Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
Centres of gravity of various shaped
plates: rectangle, circle, triangle, T, kite
and irregular.
Drawing panel.
3 Cords and ring. 5 Cords and ring.
Beam balance. Beam.
2 forces equality divided.
The simple pendulum.
Pivot screw. Adjustable hooks.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks. Light weight hooks.
Pulleys. Screws. Knurled nuts.
Large ext. spring. Small ext. spring.
Dynamometer. Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Centres of gravity (Centres of gravity (I) and Centres of gravity (II)):
Specification of the centre of gravity of plates of different shapes using the
simple pendulum and graphical methods.
2.- Triangle of forces. To test that three non-parallel forces in equilibrium
acting in the same plane can be represented by a Triangle of forces.
3.- Parallelogram of forces. When three non-parallel forces in the same plane
are in equilibrium, their lines of action meet at a point, and hence to show
that the resultant of two forces can be found using the Parallelogram of
forces.
4.- Polygon of forces. Verification of the fact that four or more forces in
equilibrium acting on the same point, can be represented by a Polygon of
forces.
5.- Principle of moments. Verification of the principle of moments for parallel
and non parallel forces.
6.- The Pivot or beam balance. To demonstrate that the action of weighing with
a beam balance or slide balance is based upon the principle of moments.
7.- Levers: To determine the mechanical advantage of various types of levers
using the ratio resistance/power (W/P) and to verify that this is the same as
the ratio between distances.
8.- Beam reaction forces. Verification of the fact that a distributed load applied
over a beam may be considered as an equivalent concentrated load
applied at the centre of gravity of the distributed load. Reactions located at
supports due to the load acting on the simply supported beam may be
calculated using the momentum principle, independent of the position of
these beam supports.
MECA2. Load Elevation Mechanisms Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
Three pulley block. Two pulley block.
Wheel and axle set. Weston differential
chain block. Screw jack. Support screw.
Adjustable hooks.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks. Light weight hook. Pulleys.
Adjustable pulley. Single pulley block.
Knurled nuts. Dynamometer. Spare rope.
Screws.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 9Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Simple pulleys. Verification of the variation of cable tension in a pulley with
the cable’s direction as it passes over the pulley. To determine the
mechanical advantages of a simple combination of fixed and movable
pulleys.
2.- Pulley blocks. Analysis of the mechanical features of a set of pulley blocks,
which has three sheaves in the upper block and two pulleys in the lower
block.
3.- Single axle and wheel. Determine the law of the Machine for a simple axle
and wheel, and the variation of mechanical advantage and efficiency with
load.
4.- Differential axle and wheel. Determine the law of the Machine for
differential axle and wheel. Verification that the mechanical advantage and
efficiency increases with load up to a limiting maximum.
5.- Weston differential chain blocks. Analysis of the specific characteristics of
these chains.
6.- Screw Jack. To measure the effort required to raise various loads using a
simple form of screw jack and to determine how the mechanical advantage
and efficiency varies with load.
MECA3 Transmissions Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
System of belt drive (includes: flat belt,
round belt and leather strip). Chain drive.
Simple gear train. Bevel gears. Worm
gears. Universal coupling. Support screw.
Adjustable screws.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks. Light weight hooks. Pulley.
Screws. Knurled nuts. Dynamometers.
Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 7Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 6
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Belt drive (Belt drive (I) and Belt drive (II): Verification of the direction of
rotation of open and crossed belt drives. Verification of the speed of
rotation of the two pulleys is inversely proportional to their diameters. To
measure the difference intension between the two sides of a belt drive and
to determine the efficiency of drive transmission.
2.- Chain drive. Verification of the speed ratio of a chain drive. Measurement
of the efficiency of drive transmission.
3.- The Geared winch (two parallel axles). Comparison of the velocity ratios of
a system of single-stage and double stage geared winch. Specification of
their corresponding mechanical advantages and efficiencies under
varying loads.
4.- Bevel gears (two intersecting axles). Verification of the efficiency velocityratio and mechanical advantages of the Bevel gear unit under different
loads.
5.- Worm gear (two crossed axles). Verification of the speed ratio of a worm
and specification of the transmission efficiency under different loads.
6.- Universal coupling. To investigate the effect of introducing universal
coupling to a simple drive shaft.
(continuation)
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
2
Modules
(continuation)
MECA4 Dynamics Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special anodized aluminium.
The spring balance.
Friction with rear.
Friction equipment.
Wheel.
Centrifugal force system.
The simple pendulum.
Adjustable screw.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks.
Adjustable pulley.
Screws.
Knurled nuts.
Small ext. Spring.
Large ext. Spring.
Dynamometer.
Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 7Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Spring balance. To verify that the extension of a coiled spring is
proportional to the load applied, to show the principle of a spring balance.
2.- Simple pendulum. To show that the time of a simple pendulum depends
only on the length of the pendulum, and to determine the value of the force
of gravity using a simple pendulum.
3.- Kinetic and potential energy. Analysis of some features of kinetic and
potential energy and to show that energy exists, that is may be transformed,
and that it may be “stored” and “given back” .
4.- Inertia. The wheel. To find the energy stores in a wheel by supplying a
known quantity of energy .
5.- Belt-pulley friction. Verification of the fact that the driving force of a
transmission belt increases with the helical angle.
6.- Centrifugal force. Demonstration of the laws of the centrifugal force.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
MECA5. Friction Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special and anodized aluminium.
Friction equipment.
Friction with roar.
Foils of friction.
Roller.
Block of wheels with roar.
Set of rollers in a marc.
Principle of wedge.
Bearings.
The simple pendulum.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks.
Light weight hook.
Pulley.
Adjustable pulley.
Single pulley block.
Screws. Knurled nuts.
Dynamometer.
Spare rope.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 6Kg.
More information in:
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sliding friction. Verification of the laws of friction and to measure the
coefficient of friction for different materials.
2.- Inclined plane (Inclined plane (I) and Inclined plane (II)) Analysis of the
forces acting on an inclined plane due to a weighted of a roller supported
on the plane. Calculation of the starting force needed for dragging a block
on the plane.
3.- Angle of friction. Measurement of the angle of friction and from it find the
coefficient of friction. To show that the coefficient of friction is equal to
tangent of the angle of friction.
4.- Friction. To show the extent to which friction is reduced by using wheels and
rollers and to compare the effects of different bearing surfaces.
5.- The wedge. Determine mechanical advantage and efficiency obtained
using two different wedges, and to show that overhauling may be
prevented if the angle of inclination of a wedge is small.
6.- Bearings. Comparison of the resistance to turning due to friction of four
bearings made of different materials, and to show something of the
progress made in bearing development.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
MECA6. Special Mechanisms Experiments
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
All experiment elements are made in
special and anodized aluminium
The cam and roller mechanisms (included
two cams).
Geneva mechanism.
The ratchet mechanisms.
Scotch yoke.
Crank mechanism.
Quick return mechanism.
Adjustable hooks.
Set of weights of 0.01N., 0.05 N., 0.1 N.,
0.5 N., 1 N., 2 N., 5 N.
Weight hooks.
Adjustable pulley.
Screws.
Knurled nuts.
Dynamometer.
Dimensions (approx.): 500 x 360 x 120
mm. Weight: 7Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Cam and roller. To study the difference aspects of cam design.
2.- Geneva motion. Verification of how the circular motion of the drive unit is
transformed into the intermittent motion of the Geneva motion, and of how
this mechanism accelerates and decelerates during the transmission
process.
3.- Ratchet mechanisms. Examination of the parts of the Ratchet assembly
supplied in which a swinging lever is fitted with two pawls.
4.- Scotch yoke. Analysis and verification of the motion of a driving crank and
its relation to the reciprocal element of motion.
5.- Crank mechanism. Analysis of the features of a crank mechanism, drawing
a rotation torque diagram and educing the relation between the crank
rotation and the slide platform movement.
6.- Quick return mechanism. To show a quick return mechanism at work and
to record the relationship between the rotation of the crank and the
movement of the slide.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en
/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.110 Basic Mechanics
7.- Mechanics & Materials
7.1- Basic Mechanics
LIMEBA. Basic Mechanics Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Software
3
Module
(MECA’s elements
mounted on
the Base Panel
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (MECA../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
MECA../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total understanding of
the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the lab exercises and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
- MECA1/SOF.
- MECA2/SOF.
- MECA3/SOF.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Statics.
- MECA4/SOF.
Load Elevation Mechanisms.
- MECA5/SOF.
Transmissions.
- MECA6/SOF.
Dynamics.
Friction.
Special Mechanisms.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
4
LIMEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
click CAL will perform the calculations.
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It includes a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
value of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/mechanicsmaterials/basic/LIMEBA.pdf
Page 8
issue:01/11
REFRIGERATION. BASIC MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0910/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TCRC
TCRC.Unit
TCRC/CIB
DAB
TCRC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED REFRIGERATION CYCLE
DEMONSTRATION UNIT, FORMED BY:
REFRIGERATION CYCLE DEMONSTRATION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR REFRIGERATION
CYCLE DEMONSTRATION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR REFRIGERATION CYCLE
DEMONSTRATION UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
TCRC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
REFRIGERATION CYCLE DEMONSTRATION UNIT
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
TCRC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
REFRIGERATION CYCLE DEMONSTRATION UNIT
10
4
TRAC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED ABSORPTION
REFRIGERATION UNIT, FORMED BY:
ABSORPTION REFRIGERATION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX ABSORPTION
REFRIGERATION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR ABSORPTION
REFRIGERATION UNIT
1
TRAC.Unit
TRAC/CIB
DAB
TRAC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
TRAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ABSORPTION REFRIGERATION UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
6
TRAC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
ABSORPTION REFRIGERATION UNIT
10
7
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
8
0910PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
9
0910PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
10
0910IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
11
0910CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
12
0910TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
13
0910MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0910/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.1- Refrigeration
TCRC. Computer Controlled Refrigeration Cycle Demonstration Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
Unit: TCRC. Refrigeration Cycle Demonstration Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TCRC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Compressor: hermetic compressor of 3/8CV. Condenser: vertical and transparent glass cylinder, through which the
serpentine can be seen, where in its inside cooling water circulates. The heat transmission surface is formed by nickel copper
spires through which the flows. Evaporator: of similar structure to that of the condenser, and with nickel copper spires.
Expansion valve. Viewer: placed between the evaporator and the expansion valve. 2 Pressure sensors, 7 Temperature
sensors, 2 Flow sensors. There is a valve of free leak with a tare of 2.3 bar, approximately, so in case of over pressure in the
condenser it will open. High pressure cut-out, that stops the compressor if the condensation pressure exceeds 2.5 bar.
2 TCRC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCRC /CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second . It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories,. for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 700 x 700 x 720 mm. Weight: 70 Kg. Control Interface: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-
Demonstration of the refrigeration
cycle by steam compression or heat
pump cycle.
2.- Relation between pressure and
temperature.
3.- Demonstration of the coolant
transfer from the evaporator to the
condenser.
4.- Load demonstration.
5.- Demonstration of the air effect in a
refrigeration system.
6.- Evaporation and condensation
temperatures effect in the
refrigeration rate and in the heat
transfer in the condenser.
7.- Analysis of the pressures relation
effect in the system behaviour.
8.- Determination of the system
operation coefficients.
9.- Estimate of the heat transmission
global coefficient between the
coolant R141-b and the water.
Other possible practices:
10.- Sensors calibration.
11-29 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/refrigeration/
TCRC.pdf
TRD2PC. Two Doors Domestic Refrigeration System Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
2
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software
Computer
(not included
in the supply)
6 Manuals
1
Unit: TRD2PC.Two Doors Domestic Refrigeration
System Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure. Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
PVC covered body.
Capillary tube as expansion device.
Evaporator with fan.
Thermostat.
Resistance heater.
Temperature sensors. Pressures sensors. Flow sensor.
Interface Box.
Data Acquisition Board.
Data Acquisition + Data Management Software.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
1.- Connecting of electrical control
circuit.
2.- Observation of the household
refrigerator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
refrigeration/TRD2PC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 35
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
9.1- Refrigeration
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=thermodynamicsthermotechnics&subarea=refrigeration&lang=en
†Basic Refrigeration
TCRC. Computer Controlled Refrigeration Cycle
Demonstration Unit
TRAC. Computer Controlled Absorption Refrigeration Unit NE
W
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
Board
- Data Management
6 Manuals
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
1
3
2
Interface Box
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Unit: TCRC. Refrigeration Cycle Demonstration Unit
1 Unit: TRAC. Absorption Refrigeration Unit
Other available Units:
NE
W
-TRD2PC. Two Doors Domestic Refrigeration System Trainer
†General Refrigeration
CO
MP
THIBAR22C. Computer Controlled Refrigeration + Heat
Pump + Air Conditioning Unit, with Cycle
Inversion Valve (two condensers and two
LE
TE
evaporators)
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
1
Unit: THIBAR22C. Refrigeration + Heat Pump +
Air Conditioning Unit, with Cycle Inversion Valve
(two condensers (water and air) and two evaporators (water and air))
THAR22C. Computer Controlled Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Unit (two condensers and two evaporators)
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
THAR2LC. Computer Controlled Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Unit (two condensers and water evaporator)
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
2
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: THAR22C. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit
(two condensers (water and air) and two evaporators
(water and air))
THARL2C. Computer Controlled Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Unit (water condenser and two evaporators)
CONTROL
1
Unit: THAR2LC. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit
(two condensers (water and air) and one evaporator (water))
3
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
4
2
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: THARL2C. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit
(one condenser (water) and two evaporators (water and air))
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
THARA2C. Computer Controlled Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Unit (air condenser and two evaporators)
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
3
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
-TRCVC. Computer Controlled Vapour-Compresion
Refrigeration Unit
1
Unit: THARA2C. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit
(one condenser (air) and two evaporators (water and air))
CONTROL
(Open Control + Multicontrol + Real Time Control)
- From COMPUTER (standard)
- From PLC (optional)
Non computer controlled version available too.
Page 55
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0910/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TCRC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR REFRIGERATION
CYCLE DEMONSTRATION UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
TRAC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR ABSORPTION
REFRIGERATION UNIT
1
1
3
0910PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0910PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
0910IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
0910CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0910TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0910MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HEAT PUMPS. BASIC MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0920/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
THIBAR22C
THIBAR22C.UNIT
THIBAR22C/CIB
DAB
THIBAR22C/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED HEAT PUMP + AIR
CONDITIONING + REFRIGERATION UNIT (DOUBLE
CONDENSER, WATER EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE
INVERSION VALVE). FORMED BY:
HEAT PUMP + AIR CONDITIONING +
REFRIGERATION UNIT, (DOUBLE CONDENSER,
DOUBLE EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE INVERSION VALVE)
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED HEAT PUMP + AIR CONDITIONING +
REFRIGERATION UNIT, (DOUBLE CONDENSER,
DOUBLE EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE INVERSION VALVE)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
HEAT PUMP + AIR CONDITIONING +
REFRIGERATION UNIT, (DOUBLE CONDENSER,
DOUBLE EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE INVERSION VALVE)
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
THIBAR22C/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
COMPUTER CONTROLLED HEAT PUMP + AIR
CONDITIONING + REFRIGERATION UNIT (DOUBLE
CONDENSER, WATER EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE
INVERSION VALVE).
10
3
THIBAR22C/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
HEAT PUMP + AIR CONDITIONING +
REFRIGERATION UNIT, (DOUBLE CONDENSER,
DOUBLE EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE INVERSION VALVE)
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0920PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0920PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0920IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0920CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0920TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0920MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0920/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.4- Heat Pumps
THIBAR22C. Computer Controlled Heat Pump + Air Conditioning + Refrigeration Unit, with Cycle Inversion Valve
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: THIBAR22C. Heat Pump + Air Conditioning +
Refrigeration Unit with Cycle Inversion Valve (two condensers
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
(water and air) and two evaporators (water and air).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
THIBAR22C. Unit:
Bench-top unit.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Cooling compressor, computer controlled.
Air condenser, computer controlled.
Water condenser.
High pressure control.
Coolant accumulation tank.
Cooling filter.
Expansion valve.
Water evaporator.
Air evaporator, computer controlled
Tank of division of the cooling liquid.
4 Manometers.
10 Temperature sensors (4 sensors measure the cooling temperature, 3 sensors
measure the water temperature, 3 sensors measure the air temperature):
Temperature sensor, J type (compressor outlet).
Temperature sensor, J type (condenser outlet/ evaporator inlet).
Temperature sensor, J type (evaporator inlet/ condenser outlet).
Temperature sensor, J type (compressor inlet).
Temperature sensor, J type (water inlet).
Temperature sensor, J type (condenser outlet/evaporator).
Temperature sensor, J type (evaporator outlet/ condenser).
Temperature sensor, J type (room air).
Temperature sensor, J type (condenser outlet/ evaporator).
Temperature sensor, J type (evaporator outlet/ condenser).
3 Flow sensors:
Cooling flow sensor.
Water flow sensor (water condenser).
Water flow sensor (water evaporator).
2 Pressure sensors:
Cooling pressure sensor (compressor outlet).
Cooling pressure sensor (compressor inlet).
Wattmeter.
Cycle Inversion valve. 4-way valve.
Enthalpy diagram of the refrigerant R134a.
2 THIBAR22C/CIB. Control Interface Box:
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the
process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All
the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from
the computer keyboard of the parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control
allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3
safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the
control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog
inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 THIBAR22C/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management
Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage
of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the
alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories,. for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 900 x 600 x 500 mm. Weight: 100 Kg.
Control Interface: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
1.- Determination of the inlet power, heat produced and performance
coefficient. Water as heat source. (Water-water heat pump ).
2.- Determination of the inlet power, produced heat and performance
coefficient. Air as heat source. (Water-air heat pump).
3.- Determination of the inlet power, produced heat and performance
coefficient. Air as heat source. (Air-air heat pump).
4.- Determination of the inlet power, heat produced and performance
coefficient. Water as heat source. (Air- water heat pump).
5.- Preparation of performance curves of the heat pump with different
inlet and outlet temperatures. Water as heat source. (Water-water
heat pump).
6.- Preparation of performance curves of the heat pump at different
inlet and outlet temperatures. Air as a heat pump. (Water-air heat
pump).
7.- Preparation of performance curves of the heat pump with different
inlet and outlet temperatures. Water as heat source. (Air-water heat
pump).
8.- Preparation of the performance curves of the heat pump with
different inlet and outlet temperatures. Air as heat source. (Air-air
heat pump).
9.- Lay out of the steam compression cycle in a diagram P-H and
comparison with the ideal cycle. Water as heat source. (Waterwater heat pump).
10.- Lay out of the steam compression cycle in a diagram P-H and
comparison with the ideal cycle. Air as heat source. (Water-air heat
pump).
11.- Lay out of the steam compression cycle in a diagram P-H and
comparison with the ideal cycle. Water as heat source. (Air-water
heat pump).
12.- Lay out of the steam compression cycle in a diagram P-H and
comparison with the ideal cycle. Air as heat source. (Air-air heat
pump).
13.- Preparation of the performance curves of the heat pump based on
the properties of the refrigerant and at different condensation and
evaporation temperatures. Water as heat source. (Water-water
heat pump).
14.- Preparation of the performance curves of the heat pump based on
the properties of the refrigerant and at different condensation and
evaporation temperatures. Air as heat source. (Water-air heat
pump).
15.- Preparation of the performance curves of the heat pump based on
the properties of the refrigerant and at different condensation and
evaporation temperatures. Water as heat source. (Air-water heat
pump).
16.- Preparation of the performance curves of the heat pump based on
the properties of the refrigerant and at different condensation and
evaporation temperatures. Air as heat source. (Air- air heat pump).
17.- Practices with cycle inversion.
Other possible practices:
18.- Temperature sensors calibration.
19.- Flow sensors calibration.
20.- Refrigerant flow sensor. (Heat pump water-water)
21.- Pressure sensors calibration.(Water-water pump)
22-40 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
thermodynamicsthermotechnics/heatpumps/THIBAR22C.pdf
Other available versions:
- THIBAR44C.
Computer Controlled Heat Pump + Air Conditioning + Refrigeration Unit with Cycle Inversion Valve (four condensers (two of
water and two of air) and four evaporators (two of water and two of air)).
- THIBAR44B.
Computer Controlled Heat Pump + Air Conditioning + Refrigeration Unit with Cycle Inversion Valve (four condensers (two of
water and two of air) and four evaporators (two of water and two of air)).
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 39
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0920/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
THIBAR22C/PLCSOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER
CONTROLLED HEAT PUMP + AIR CONDITIONING +
REFRIGERATION UNIT (DOUBLE CONDENSER, WATER
EVAPORATOR AND CYCLE INVERSION VALVE).
1
1
2
0920PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0920PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0920IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0920CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0920TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0920MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
AIR CONDITIONING. BASIC MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0930/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TAAC
TAAC.Unit
TAAC/CIB
DAB
TAAC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED AIR CONDITIONING
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT, FORMED BY:
AIR CONDITIONING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR AIR CONDITIONING
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR AIR CONDITIONING
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
TAAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR AIR
CONDITIONING EQUPMENT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
TAAC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR AIR
CONDITIONING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
10
4
TTEC
BENCH TOP COOLING TOWER, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
BENCH TOP COOLING TOWER
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BENCH TOP COOLING
TOWER
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BENCH TOP COLLING
TOWER
1
TTEC.Unit
TTEC/CIB
DAB
TTEC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
TTEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BENCH
TOP COOLING TOWER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
6
TTEC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
BENCH TOP COOLING TOWER
10
7
TTEC/OC
OPTIONAL COLUMNS FOR BENCH TOP COOLING
TOWER. FORMED BY:
COLUMN TYPE A
COLUMN TYPE C
COLUMN TYPE D
COLUMN TYPE E
TTEC/A
TTEC/C
TTEC/D
TTEC/E
1
1
1
1
8
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
9
0930PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
10
0930PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
11
0930IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
12
0930CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
0930TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
Ref: 0930/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.5- Air Conditioning
(continuation)
TAAC. Computer Controlled Air Conditioning Laboratory Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TAAC. Air Conditioning Laboratory Unit
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
airconditioning/TAAC.pdf
1.-
Demonstration of the processes
and components used in heating,
cooling, humidification, dehumidification of an airstream.
2.- Obtaining of the steam generator
efficiency curve.
3.- Energy balance in the steam
generator.
4.- Efficiency determination of the
preheating resistance.
5.- Preheating effect in an air
conditioning installation.
6.- Dehumidification process study.
7.- Material balance in the evaporator.
8.- Energy balance in the evaporator.
9.- Re-heat effect.
10.- Experimental determination of the
air specific heating capacity.
Other possible practices:
11.- Psychrometric chart.
12.- Example of the air properties
determination.
13.- Usage of psychrometric chart.
14.- Determination of the airflow.
15.- Temperature sensors calibration.
16.- Pressure sensors calibration.
17.- Determination of a PWM controller
adjustment parameters.
18.- Properties of the Refrigerant R134a.
19.- Enthalpy-Pressure diagram for the
refrigerant R134a.
20-38.- Practice with PLC.
TARC. Computer Controlled Recirculating Air Conditioning Unit
Always included
in the supply:
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
Teaching
Technique
used
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TARC. Recirculating Air Conditioning Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TARC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real
unit.
Tunnel, made in stainless steel with 2 windows of 200 x 300 mm. to visualize the tunnel inside. 3 electrical
heating resistances. Fan, with speed control by computer. Evaporator. Compressor. Condenser unit.
Condensate measurement. High-pressure cut-out. Flow meter. Filter.
Sensors included: 12 Temperature sensors. 4 Pressure sensors. Flow sensor. Refrigerant flow sensor.
Manometers. Enthalpy diagram of the refrigerant R134a.
2 TARC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled.
Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors
involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time
from thekeyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility
of modifications from the computer keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open
control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety
levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling
rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TARC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic
representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 2700 x 1100 x 1600 mm.Weight: 250 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
airconditioning/TARC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 43
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Demonstration of the processes of air heating,
cooling, humidification, de-humidification,
recirculating and mixing.
2.- Demonstration of recirculating and the
"adiabatic" mixing of two air steams at different
states and enables the resulting condition to be
plotted on the psychrometric chart.
3.- It enables the condensate formed during dehumidification to be compared with that expected
from the change of air properties across the
evaporator.
4.- Comparison between the heat transfer to the
refrigerant and the heat transfer from the air at the
cooling section.
5.- Compares the heat transfer at the boiler with the
enthalpy increase of the air during steam
injection.
6.- Obtaining of the steam generator efficiency
curve.
7.- Energy balance in the steam generator.
8.- Efficiency determination of the preheating
resistance.
9.- Preheating effect in an air conditioning
installation.
10.- De-humidification process study.
11.- Material balance in the evaporator.
12.- Energy balance in the evaporator.
13.- Re-heat effect.
14.- Experimental determination of the air specific
heating capacity.
Other possible practices:
15.- Psychrometric chart.
16.- Determination of the air flow.
17.- Example of the air properties determination.
18.- Properties of the Refrigerant R134a.
19.- Enthalpy-Pressure diagram for the refrigerant
R134a.
20-38 .- Practices with PLC.
1.-
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
Items supplied as standard
TAAC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Tunnel of 300 x 300 x 1600 mm. , made in stainless steel with 2 windows of 200 x 300 mm. to visualize the tunnel inside. 2
electrical resistances: one of 2000W (pre-heater) to the inlet of the evaporator and other of 1000 W (re-heater) to the outlet
of the evaporator.4 Hygrometers placed along the tunnel, formed each one by 2 temperature sensors (wet and dry bulb).
Fan, with speed controlled by computer. Evaporator. Compressor. Condenser unit. Condensate measurement. Highpressure cut-out. Filter dryer. Flow meter.
Sensors included:
Temperature (12): 4 dry bulb, 4 wet bulb, 1 “J” type (inlet of the evaporator), 1 “J” type (outlet of the evaporator), 1 “J”
type(outlet of the condenser). Pressure (6): 1 sensor (outlet of the condenser), 1 sensor (inlet of the condenser), 1
differential sensor (measure of flow), 1bourdon manometer (outlet of the condenser), 1 bourdon manometer (inlet of the
evaporator),1bourdon manometer (outlet of the evaporator). 1 Refrigerant flow sensor.
2 TAAC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and th the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up
to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TAAC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories,for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1600x570x1500 mm. Weight:200 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
9.5- Air Conditioning
(continuation)
TAAUC. Computer Controlled Automobile Air Conditioning Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Data
Control
Acquisition
Interface Box
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
1
Unit: TAAUC. Automobile Air Conditioning Trainer
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TAAUC. Unit:
Bench-top unit. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel.
2 Fans with speed control by computer. Condenser. Compressor, computer controlled. Filter. Electrical engine with speed
control by computer (it simulates the car combustion motor). Evaporator. Expansion valve. Refrigerant tank. 5 Temperature
sensors, type “J”. 2 Absolute pressure sensors. Flow sensor(refrigerant). Automobile control panel (including in the control
interface box). Ventilation motors visualization (including in the control interface box). Enthalpy diagram R134a.
2 TAAUC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up
to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TAAUC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories,. for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1560x860x760 mm. Weight:150 Kg. Control Interface: 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-General use of the air conditioning:
Manual /Auto modes.
2.-Cooling with and without internal
circulation.
3.-Speed of the automobile engine.
4.-Cooling in function of the radiator
fans.
5.-Cooling in function of the automobile
inlet fan.
6.-Energy balance in the evaporator.
7.-Matter balance in the evaporator.
8.-Experimental determination of the
specific calorific capacity of the air.
9.-Optimum determination of the
parameters involved in an air
conditioning process.
10.-Temperature sensors calibration.
11.-Absolute pressure sensors calibration.
Other possible practices:
12.-Use of a psychometric map.
13.-Properties of the coolant R134a.
14.-Enthalpy diagram-pressure of the
R134a.
15-33.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
airconditioning/TAAUC.pdf
9.6- Cooling Towers
TTEC. Computer Controlled Bench Top Cooling Tower
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TTEC. Bench Top Cooling Tower
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TTEC. Unit:
Bench top unit. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front
panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Water3propeller pump, maximum flow of water of 120 l./h. -2
l./min. Air propeller with a fan speed computer controlled (145 m /h max., 3000 rpm). Heater resistance (60º C. Max),
computer controlled. Water tank (14l.) with water level gauge. On/Off level switch for filling the tank. Solenoid valves.
Flow sensor. 2 Differential pressure sensors, range: 0 - 1” H20. Up to 16 Temperature sensors type “J” (of wet bulb, dry bulb
and water temperature), according to the column supplied . Range: -60ºC to 200ºC.
Column type B: Nº 2of levels:
8. Nº of sheets by level: 10. Total surface: 1.013 m2.Height of packaging: 650mm. Density
Area/volume: 58 m /m3.
-Optional Columns: (not included in the standard supply)
Column type A: Nº of levels: 8. Nº of sheets by level: 19. Total
surface: 1.915 m2. Height of packaging: 650 mm.
Density Area/volume: 112.64 m2/m3.
Column type C:Nº of levels: 8. Nº of sheets by level: 7. Total
surface: 0.680 m2. Height of packaging: 650 mm.
Density Area/volume: 40.02 m2/m3.
Column type D:No packaging.
Column type E: (Packing characteristics column): with packing arranged to allow measurement of air and water
properties within column. Fitted with temperature sensors in 3 points.
Sensors: 7 temperature sensors of Dry Bulb, 7 temperature sensors of Wet Bulb and 3
water temperature sensors.
Nº of levels: 8. Nº of sheets by level:
19. Height of column: 1100mm. Height of packaging: 650 mm.
Density Area/volume: 112.64 m2/m3.
2 TTEC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from thekeyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TTEC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1000 x 450 x 1400 mm. Weight: 100 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight:10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
coolintgtowers/TTEC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1 .- Process observation inside a bench
top cooling tower.
2 .- Determination of evaporation
velocity.
3 .- Mass balance. Use of psychrometric
charts.
4 .- Energy balance.
5 .- Effect of cooling load against "Wet
bulb approach".
6 .- Relation between air velocity, wet
bulb approach and head loss.
7 .- Determination of the cooling
capacity.
8 .- Determination of the cooling
capacity for different cooling
towers.
9 .- Thermodynamic properties.
10.- Evaporation from a wet bed.
11.- Observation of water flow pattern
and distribution.
12.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
13.- Control system: PID temperature
control.
14.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
15.- Study of flow sensor hysteresis.
16.- Control system: Determination of
adjustment parameters of a PWM
controller.
17.- Differential pressure sensors
calibration.
Other possible practices:
18.- Variation of specific enthalpy with
pressure.
19.- Properties of air.
20.- Use of a psychometric map.
21.- Determination of water flow.
22-40 .- Practices with PLC.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0930/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TAAC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR AIR CONDITIONING
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
TTEC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR BENCH TOP COOLING
TOWER
1
1
3
0930PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0930PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
0930IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
0930CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0930TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0930MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HEATING MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0940/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
EACC
EACC.Unit
EACC/CIB
EACC/CCSOF
EACC-DAS
DESCRIPTION
HOT WATER PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING
UNIT, FORMED BY:
HOT WATER PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING
UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR HOT WATER
PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING UNIT
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE HOT WATER PRODUCTION
AND HEATING TEACHING UNIT
STANDARD PCI DATA ACQUISITION BOARD FOR HOT
WATER PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
EACC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HOT
WATER PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING UNIT
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
3
EACC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR HOT
WATER PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING UNIT
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0940PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0940PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0940IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0940CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0940TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0940MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0940/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.1- Refrigeration
(continuation)
TPCC. Computer Controlled Contact Plate Freezer
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TPCC. Contact Plate Freezer
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TPCC. Unit:
Basically, this quick freezing unit is made up of refrigeration circuit. The unit has been designed to observe the
thermodynamic changes made during the process, for given coolant, allowing the study of the refrigeration cycle. Anodized
aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2 Manometers.
Coolant compressor. Air condenser. High pressure control. Coolant accumulation tank. Expansion valve. Four-way valve.
Evaporator-freezer, with two freezing plates of 180 mm x 280 mm. One freezing plate is fixed and the other one is height
adjustable. Plate temperature (both plates): <-35ºC.
8 Temperature sensors: 2 Temperature sensors (temperature measurement of the coolant), 6 temperature sensors
(temperature measurement of the food). Enthalpy diagram of the coolant R404a.
2 TPCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TPCC /CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories,. for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 900x600x500 mm. Weight:100 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of industrial freezing process.
Study of food preservation.
Study the effect of freezing on food.
Investigate the effect on the freezing
process of parameters such as the
shape of the product, portion size,
the packaging, etc.
5.- To evaluate the difference between
fast freezing and domestic freezing.
6.- Freezing rates.
7.- Study of fast freezing vs slow
freezing.
8.- Temperature sensing.
9.- Taste and texture assessments.
10.- Study of the deep-freezing process
effect: structural.
11.- Study of the deep-freezing process
effect: compositional.
12.- Study of the deep-freezing process
effect: sensorial.
13.- Study of the thermal process.
14.- Study the effect of the temperature
on bacteria.
15.- Quality control.
16.- Quality assurance.
17.- Freezing curves analysis.
18.- Links with Physics (refrigeration) and
with Biology (food structure).
Other possible practices:
19.- Sensors calibration.
20-38 .- Practices with PLC.
refrigeration/TPCC.pdf
9.3Heating
9.3- HEATING
EACC. Computer Controlled Hot Water Production and Heating Teaching Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: EACC. Hot Water Production and
Heating Teaching Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
EACC. Unit:
This unit has as objectives: to produce hot water heating and similar uses; hot water production for a sanitary use, industrial
use, etc.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
In order to make it oeasier, and being given that the process can be exhaustively analysed, we will just produce hot water
maximum up to 95 C. The unit has a fuel portable deposit, burner, boiler with exchanger, accumulator and hot water exit.
The whole system is computer controlled through a control interface, which controls the following parameters: fuel control
(consumption), smokes temperature, boiler temperature, sanitary water temperature, heating water temperature, net water
temperature, burner aspiration pressure, quantity of CO2 and CO. Automatic burner for 25,000 Kcal/h. Acceleration
pump. Stainless steel accumulator of 140 l. Three ways engine motorized valve. Sheet chimney. Closed expansion deposit.
Sensors of temperature, pressure and flow.
2 EACC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EACC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories,. for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/heating/
EACC.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-
Determination of the flow and fuel
consumption.
2.- Determination of the boiler’s
temperature.
3.- Determination of the heating water
exit temperature.
4.- Determination of the sanitary water
exit temperature.
5.- Determination of the net water exit
temperature.
6.- Determination of the burner
aspiration pressure.
7.- Energy balance of the heating
circuit.
8.- Energy balance of the sanitary
water circuit.
9.- Influence of the aspiration pressure
in the efficiency.
10.- Variation of the exhaust gases, in
function of the combustion
quality.
Other possible practices:
11.- Sensors calibration.
12-30 .- Practices with PLC.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0940/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
EACC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HOT WATER
PRODUCTION AND HEATING TEACHING UNIT
1
1
2
0940PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0940PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0940IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0940CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0940TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0940MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HEAT TRANSFER MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0950/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TSTCC
TSTCC/CIB
DAB
TSTCC/CCSOF
TXC/CL
TXC/CR
TXC/RC
TXC/CC
TXC/SE
TXC/ER
TXC/EI
TXC/LG
TXC/FF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROL HEAT TRANSFER SERIES,
FORMED BY:
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR HEAT TRANSFER
SERIES
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR HEAT TRANSFER SERIES
LINEAR HEAT CONDUCTION MODULE
RADIAL HEAT CONDUCTION MODULE
RADIATION HEAT CONDUCTION MODULE
COMBINED FREE AND FORCE CONVECTION AND
RADIATION MODULE
EXTENDED SURFACE HEAT TRANSFER MODULE
RADIATION ERRORS IN TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
MODULE
UNSTEADY STATE HEAT TRASNFER MODULE
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF LIQUID AND GAS
MODULE
FREE AND FORCED CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER
MODULE
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
TSTCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HEAT
TRANSFER(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
FOR MODULES: TXC/CL, TXC/CR, TXC/RC,
TXC/CC, TXC/SE, TXC/ER. TXC/EI, TXC/LG,
TXC/FF. TXC/TE. TXC/MM, TXC/TC AND TXC/TI
10
3
TSTCC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
HEAT TRANSFER SERIES
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0950PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0950PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0950IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0950CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0950TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0950MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0950/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.8- Heat Transfer (Basic)
TSTCC. Computer Controlled Heat Transfer Series:
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
Control
Interface Box
1.1
TXC/CL. Linear Heat
Conduction Module (
1.4
1.6
1.2
TXC/CC. Combined Free and Forced
Convection and Radiation Module (
TXC/ER. Radiation Errors in
Temperature Measurement
Module ( )
1.10
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Available Modules
)
1.7
TXC/CR. Radial Heat
Conduction Module (
1.11
1.3 TXC/RC.
Radiation Heat
Conduction Module ( )
)
1.5
)
TXC/EI. Unsteady State Heat
Transfer Module ( )
TXC/TE. 3 Axis Heat Transfer
Module ( )
( )
Computer Control
Software for each
Module
1.8
TXC/SE. Extended Surface
Heat Transfer Module ( )
TXC/LG. Thermal Conductivity
of Liquids and Gases Module (
TXC/MM. Metal to Metal Heat
Transfer Module ( )
1.12
1.9
)
TXC/FF. Free and Forced Convection
Heat Transfer Module ( )
TXC/TC. Ceramic Heat
Transfer Module ( )
1.13
TXC/TI. Isolated Material Heat
Transfer Module ( )
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1 Available Modules
TXC/CL. Linear Heat Conduction Module:
Anodized aluminium structure.Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the
real unit.
Lineal conduction module consist on :input heat section, electric heater with controller circuit.
Temperature sensors.
Refrigeration section with a surface cooled by water and 4 Temperature sensors.
Central section: with brass of 25 mm of diameter and brass of 10 mm of diameter, with stainless steel of
25 mm of diameter; 3 Temperature sensors. Digital wattmeter of 0 to 120 W.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module:
(#)Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of
data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the
alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.2 TXC/CR. Radial Heat Conduction Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Brass disk of 110 mm of diameter and 3 mm of thickness. Electric heater. Peripherical cooling tube. 6
Temperature sensors distanced 10 mm.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions (approx.):300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.3 TXC/RC. Radiation Heat Conduction Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
This unit consists on a metal plate with a resistance at one side and a lamp in the another side. Lengthwise
of the metal plate you can place the elements supplied with the unit. Resistance that allows to heat and to
study the radiation. The unit is provided with accessories for light experiments and radiation experiments.
Light accessories: luxometer, filters, filters porthole.
Radiation accessories: radiometer, planes surfaces. There are elements for studding the radiation and
each one contains one temperature sensor: polished aluminium, anodized aluminium, brass. 2 Black
body. Variable slit or aperture. It allows to regulate the area of the radiation. 6 Temperature sensors.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.) : 1400 x 820 x 900 mm. Weight: 40 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.1
Continue...
Non computer controlled version available.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
Data
Acquisition
Board
Page 47
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Practices to be done with the Linear Heat Conduction
Module (TXC/CL):
1.- Conduction in a simple bar.
2.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
3.- Conduction through a compound bar.
4.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”, of the
stainless steel.
5.- Determination of the thermal contact resistance Rtc.
6.- Effect of the crossing sectional area.
7.- Insulation effect.
8.- Temperature sensors calibration.
9-27 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Radial Heat Conduction
Module (TXC/CR):
28.- Radial conduction.
29.- Calibration of the temperature sensors.
30.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
31.- Determination of the thermal contact resistance Rtc.
32.- Effect of the crossing sectional area.
33.- Insulation effect.
34-52 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Radiation Heat Conduction
Module (TXC/RC):
53.- Inverse of the distant square law for the radiation.
54.- Stefan-Boltzman´s law.
55.- Emission power I.
56.- Emission power II.
57.- Kirchhorff´s law.
58.- Area factors.
59.- Inverse of the distant square law for the light.
60.- A´lamberts cosine´s law.
61.- A´lamberts absorption´s law.
62-80 .- Practices with PLC.
Continue...
www.edibon.com
9.8- Heat Transfer (Basic)
(continuation)
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY (continuation)
Available Modules (continuation)
TXC/CC. Combined Free and Forced Convection and Radiation Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Centrifugal fan of
2650 rpm, max. flow: 1200l/min and air max. velocity around 5 m/s. Stainless steel conduct with interior
cover, formed by: temperature sensor, in order to measure the temperature of inlet air; anemometer for
measuring the air flow (natural convection), differential pressure sensor for measuring the air flow (forced
convection) and temperature sensor in order to measure the temperature of outlet floodgate.
Heater: copper cylinder with exterior cover: interior resistance of 150W., temperature sensor for
measuring the temperature of the cylinder. Temperature sensor. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 430 x 350 x 1300 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.5 TXC/SE. Extended Surface Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 300 W Resistance,
embedded in a copper capsule to permit a good contact with the interchangeable fins. The copper
capsule is isolated by a coat of Teflon. The power to the resistance is controlled from the computer control
software by a 0-10 Volts signal. 11 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 600 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.6 TXC/ER. Radiation Errors in Temperature Measurement Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Centrifugal fan of
2650 rpm, max. flow 1200l/min and air max. velocity around 5 m/s. Stainless steel conduct with interior
cover, formed by: temperature sensor, in order to measure the temperature of inlet air; flow sensor,
temperature sensor, in order to measure the temperature of outlet floodgate. Copper cylinder with
exterior cover: interior resistance of 150W. temperature sensor for measuring the temperature of the
cylinder. 5 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 430 x 350 x 1300 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.7 TXC/EI . Unsteady State Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Water tank. Different
shapes of various materials are studied. Heating element (3000 W). The high power allows reaching the
steady state faster. Water pump with variable speed is controlled by an inverter, maximum flow of 4 l./min.
3 Temperature sensors allow controlling the stability of the temperature of the water bath. Flow sensor. 2
Temperature sensors. The first one permits to record the evolution of the temperature of the shape at its
center. The second one, works as a stop watch, it will indicate the precise moment in which the shape is
submerged. Level indicator. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.):600 x 600 x 750 mm. Weight: 60 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.8 TXC/LG. Thermal Conductivity of Liquids and Gases Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Aluminium body with
brass jacket. Resistance. Valves. 5 Temperature sensors. Syringe. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.9 TXC/FF. Free and Forced Convection Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Stainless steel tunnel.
Methacrylate viewer that allows a good visualization of the exchanger in use. Variable speed fan.
Heating resistance. Flow sensor. 9 Temperature sensors. 3 Exchanger: flat heat exchanger, dowels heat
exchanger, blade heat exchanger. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions: 370 x 610 x 920 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.10 TXC/TE. 3 Axis Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 3 Axis conduction
module. Electric heater. 8 Temperature sensors. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions: 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.11 TXC/MM. Metal to Metal Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Electric heater. 6
Temperature sensors. Materials to test: copper, brass, stainless steel, aluminium (to choose).
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions: 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.12 TXC/TC. Ceramic Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Electric heater. 6
Temperature sensors. Suitable for ceramic materials. This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module .(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
1.13 TXC/TI. Isolated Material Heat Transfer Module:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Electric heater. 8
Temperature sensors. Suitable for fibrous, granular and sheet materials. Suitable for homogeneous and
non-homogeneous materials. Suitable for soft, semi-rigid and rigid materials.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for this Module.(#)
Dimensions (approx.): 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
This module required Control Interface Box (TSTCC/CIB) and Data Acquisition Board (DAB).
Items Common for the Modules type “TXC”
2 TSTCC/CIB. Control Interface Box:
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled.
Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all
sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed
at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment
during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of parameters
involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third
one in the control software.
Dimensions (approx.): 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
Practices to be done with the Combined Free and
Forced Convection and Radiation Module(TXC/CC):
81.- Control System: Temperature sensors calibration.
82.- Control System: Air flow sensor calibration.
83.- Demonstration of the combined transmission effect of
the radiation and convection on the surface of the
cylinder. Determination of the combined transmission
effect of heating by forced convection an radiation.
84.- Demonstration of the influence of air flow in the
heating transfer. Determination of the combined
transmission effect of heating by forced convection
and radiation.
85.- Demonstration of the influence of input power in the
heating transfer. Determination of the combined
transmission effect of heating by forced convection
and radiation.
86.- Demonstration of the combined transmission effect of
the radiation and convection on the surface of the
cylinder. Determination of the combined transmission
effect of heating by free convection and radiation.
87.- Determination of the airflow.
88-106 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Extended Surface Heat
Transfer Module(TXC/SE):
107.-Heat transfer from a Fin.
108.-Effect of cross section shape in heat transfer from a Fin
109.-Heat transfer from Fins of two different materials.
110-128 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Radiation Errors in
Temperature Measurement Module (TXC/ER):
129.-Radiation errors in temperature measurement.
130.-Control System: Temperature sensors calibration.
131.-Control System: Temperature air flow sensors
calibration.
132-150 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Unsteady State Heat
Transfer Module(TXC/EI):
151.-Predicting temperature at the center of a cylinder
using transient conduction with convection.
152.-Predicting the conductivity of a similar shape
constructed from a different material.
153.-Conductivity and temperature dependence on
volume.
154.-Conductivity and temperature dependence on
surrounding temperature T¥ .
155-173 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Thermal Conductivity of
Liquids and Gases Module (TXC/LG):
174.- Control System: Temperature sensors calibration.
175.- Unit calibration.
176.- Obtaining of the curve of thermal conductivity of the
air.
177.-Determination of thermal conductivity in vacuum.
178.- Determination of water thermal conductivity.
179.- Thermal conductivity determination of a mineral oil.
180-198 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Free and Forced
Convection Heat Transfer Module (TXC/FF):
199.-Free convection in flat surfaces.
200.-Forced convection in flat surfaces.
201.-Dependence of the heat transmission with the
temperature.
202.-Dependence of the heat transmission with the speed
of the fluid.
203.-Dependence of the heat transmission with the
exchanger geometry.
204.-Temperature distribution in the additional surfaces.
205-223 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the 3 Axis Heat Transfer
Module (TXC/TE):
224.-Calibration processes.
225.-Temperature sensors calibration.
226.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”,
through 3 axis.
227-245 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Metal to Metal Heat
Transfer Module (TXC/MM):
246.-Calibration processes.
247.-Temperature sensors calibration.
248.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
249.- Insulation effect.
250.-Determination of the thermal contact resistance.
251-269.- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Ceramic Heat Transfer
Module (TXC/TC):
270.-Calibration processes.
271.-Temperature sensors calibration.
272.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
273.-Calculation of the heat transfer properties of
specimens.
274-292 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Isolated Material Heat
Transfer Module (TXC/TI):
293.- Calibration processes.
294.-Temperature sensors calibration.
295.-Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
296.-Calculation of the heat transfer properties of
specimens.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/ 297-315 .- Practices with PLC.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1.4
heattransferbasic/TSTCC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 48
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0950/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TSTCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HEAT TRANSFER
SERIES
1
1
2
0950PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0950PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0950IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0950CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0950TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0950MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HEAT TRANSFER.MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 0951
ITEM
1
1 / 3
REFERENCE
TTLFC
TTLFC.Unit
TTLFC/CIB
DAB
TTLFC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FLUIDISATION AND FLUID
BED HEAT TRANSFER UNIT, FORMED BY:
FLUIDISATION AND FLUID BED HEAT TRANSFER
UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR FLUIDISATION AND
FLUID BED HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FLUIDISATION AND
FLUID BED HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
TTLFC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
FLUIDISATION AND FLUID BED HEAT TRANSFER
UNIT(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
TCEC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED BOILING HEAT TRANSFER
EQUIPMENT, FORMED BY:
BOILING HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR BOILING HEAT
TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR BOILING HEAT
TRANSFER EQUIPMEN
1
TCEC.Unit
TCEC/CIB
DAB
TCEC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
4
TCEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HOT
BOILING HEAT TRANFSFER EQUIPMENT PRODUCTION
AND HEATING EQUIPMENT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
5
TCLFC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FREE AND FORCED
CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER UNIT, FORMED BY:
FREE AND FORCED CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER
UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR FREE AND FORCED
CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FREE AND FORCED
CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
1
TCLFC.Unit
TCLFC/CIB
DAB
TCLFC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
6
TCLFC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FREE
AND FORCED CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
7
TIFCC
CROSS FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
CROSS FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR CROSS FLOW HEAT
EXCHANGER
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR CROSS FLOW HEAT
EXCHANGER
1
TIFCC.Unit
TIFCC/CIB
DAB
TIFCC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
8
TIFCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR CROSS
FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
9
TMT
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT UNIT
1
Ref: 0951
ITEM
2 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
10
TMT/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
11
TCCC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED HEAT CONDUCTION UNIT,
FORMED BY:
HEAT CONDUCTION UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR HEAT CONDUCTION
UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR HEAT CONDUCTION UNIT
1
TCCC.Unit
TCCC/CIB
DAB
TCCC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
12
TCCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HEAT
CONDUCTION UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
13
TFEC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FLOW BOILING
DEMONSTRATION UNIT, FORMED BY:
FLOW BOILING DEMONSTRATION UNIT
ELECTRONC INTERFACE FOR FLOW BOILING
DEMONSTRATION UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ADQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FLOW BOILING
DEMONSTRATION UNIT
1
TFEC.Unit
TFEC/CIB
DAB
TFEC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
14
TFEC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW
BOILING DEMONSTRATION UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
15
0951PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
16
0951PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
17
0951IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
18
0951CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
19
0951TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
20
0951MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0951
3 / 3
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.9- Heat Transfer (General)
(continuation)
TTLFC. Computer Controlled Fluidisation and Fluid Bed Heat Transfer Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
Unit: TTLFC. Fluidisation and Fluid Bed Heat Transfer Unit
1
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TTLFC. Unit:
This unit has been designed to provide visual and quantitative results related to the flow of air through both a packed and a
fluidised bed of granular material. Clear experimental set-up for investigations of the heat transfer in a fluidised bed. It also
provides quantitative results related to heat transfer in a fluidised bed.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit. Glass chamber containing the bed material and electric heater for heat transfer
studies. Variable transformer to vary the heater power input. Voltmeter and Ammeter functions. Flow sensors to measure air
flow through bed. Temperature sensors for indicating the temperatures of heater surface, air inlet, probe, etc. Pressure sensors
for measuring pressure drop through bed.
2 TTLFC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TTLFC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 800 x 500 x 800 mm. Weight: 50 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1 .- Observation of the behaviour in a
fluidised bed of a wide range of
granular materials, from onset of
fluidisation to entrainment.
2 .- Investigation of the effect of
distributor design on bed
behaviour.
3 .- Measurement of air flow and
pressure drop through variety of
granular materials, as packed and
as fluidised beds.
4 .- Demonstration of separation by
particle size and density.
5 .- Investigation of the effect of:
Superficial velocity.
Depth of immersion.
Particle size.
on the surface heat transfer
coefficient for a hot surface in a
fluidised bed.
Other possible practices:
6 .- Sensors calibration.
7-25 .- Practices with PLC.
heattransfergeneral/TTLFC.pdf
TCEC. Computer Controlled Boiling Heat Transfer Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: TCEC. Boiling Heat Transfer Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TCEC. Unit:
This unit allows the student to see the processes taking place inside a cylinder and measure temperatures and heat flux
under steady state conditions. Students can investigate the modes of boiling and can make qualitative and quantitatives
studies and assessments of convective, nucleate and film boiling.
Bench-top unit, designed to employ the coolant gas R141-b.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Chamber: cylinder of boron silicate of high resistance; internal diameter of 90 mm., external diameter of 100mm. and
longitude of 300 mm.
Heating resistance of 470 W, stuffed in a copper cylinder of internal diameter of 12.7 mm., external diameter of 16mm. and
longitude of 50 mm. Heater control from the computer by means of the control a phase angle controller.
Serpentine condenser: a copper tube plated with a surface of 0.043 m2.
Load valve, placed in the bottom part of the cylinder and it is used for charging and discharging the unit.
Control valve of water flow, regulates the water flow that inputs the serpentine. Purge and safety valve.
5 Temperature sensors (“J” type): one sensor measures the temperature of the hot surface, other sensor measures the
temperature of the coolant, other one at the water inlet and other at the water outlet, and the last one determines the
temperature of the saturated vapour.
1 Absolute pressure sensor from 0 to 6.5 bar. The electric power consumed by the resistance is controlled from the computer
and measured by a wattmeter. Flow sensor 0 to 6.5 l/min.
Temperature circuit breaker. High-pressure cutout.
2 TCEC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from thekeyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCEC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 700 x 700 x 720 mm. Weight: 70 Kg. Control Interface: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TCEC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 50
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Visual demonstration of the three
boiling modalities (convective,
nucleate and film boiling).
2.- Determination of the thermal flow
and the superficial heat transfer
coefficient.
3.- Effect of the pressure on the critical
thermal flow.
4.- Film Condensation.
5.- Demonstration of the liquid
dragging for the vapour.
6.- Relationship between the pressure
and the temperature.
7.- Air effect in one installation.
8.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
9.- Control System: temperature sensors
calibration.
10.- Control System: flow sensor
calibration.
11.- Calibration of the absolute pressure
sensor.
Other possible practices:
12.- Gauge pressure/Enthalpy.
13.- Properties of the R141b.
14-32 Practices with PLC.
9.9- Heat Transfer (General)
(continuation)
TCPGC. Computer Controlled Film and Dropwise Condensation Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TCPGC. Film and Dropwise Condesation Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TCPGC. Unit:
This unit has been specially designed for students use and to provide visual results and quantitative results related to heat
transfer during condensation. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram
in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Steam chamber: thick walled glass cylinder with
PTFE seals. 2 Condensers, water cooled, mounted in upper cylinder cover (dropwise condenser and filmwise condener).
Electric heating element with thermal protection (3 KW). Heater control. It incorporates its own steam generator and air
extraction system (air cooler, separator and water jet vacuum pump and valves).Temperature sensors. Pressure sensor. 2
Flow sensors. Safety pressure switch. Heater thermal protection. Pressure reliev valve.
2 TCPGC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safe levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCPGC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 700 x 500 x 700 mm. Weight: 70 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Investigation of the saturation
pressure/temperature relationship
for water between about 200 C and
1000 C.
2.- Visual observation of filmwise and
dropwise condensation, and of
nucleate boiling.
3.- Measurement of heat flux and
surface heat transfer coefficient in
both filmwise and dropwise
condensation at pressures up to
atmospheric.
4.- Demonstration and investigation of
the effect of air in condensers.
5.- Demostration of Daltons Law.
Other possible practices:
6.- Sensors calibration.
7-25 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TCPGC.pdf
TCLFC. Computer Controlled Free and Forced Convection Heat Transfer Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
Sight of the different heat exchangers used
1
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Unit: TCLFC. Free and Forced Convection Heat Transfer Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TCLFC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Stainless
steel tunnel, 700 mm long, painted and resistant to corrosion. Methacrylate viewer that allows a good visualization of the
exchanger that is in use. Stabilizers to guarantee an uniform air flux. 9 Temperature sensors. Maximum working temperature:
100ºC. Flow sensor. 3 Aluminium exchangers: Flat Heat Exchanger, Dowels Heat Exchanger, Blade heat exchanger.
Heating resistance, computer controlled. Variable speed fan, computer controlled.
2 TCLFC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCLFC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 370 x 610 x 920 mm. Weight: 20 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TCLFC.pdf
Page 52
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Free convection in flat surfaces.
2.- Forced convection in flat surfaces.
3.- D e p e n d e n c e o f t h e h e a t
transmission with the temperature.
4.- D e p e n d e n c e o f t h e h e a t
transmission with the speed of the
fluid.
5.- D e p e n d e n c e o f t h e h e a t
transmission with the exchanger
geometry.
6.- Temperature distribution in the
additional surfaces.
7.- Study of the advantage of using
spiked and bladed surfaces in heat
transmission in free convection.
8.- Study of the advantage of using
spiked and bladed surfaces in heat
transmission in forced convection.
9.- Comparative study between the free
convection of a horizontal surface
and vertical surface.
Other possible practices:
10.- Sensors calibration.
11-29 .- Practices with PLC.
9.9- Heat Transfer (General)
(continuation)
TIFCC. Computer Controlled Cross Flow Heat Exchanger
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Different plate exchangers in detail
Unit: TIFCC. Cross Flow Heat Exchanger
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TIFCC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Mouth bell input of resistant stainless steel resistant to the corrosion. Stainless steel tunnel of 1200 mm of length and resistant
to the corrosion. Fan. Flange of joining elastic tunnel-fab with band. 8 Temperature sensors. Pressure sensor. Heating
resistance of 175 W. Heating resistance of 12.5 W (X6). Single tube plate exchanger. Tube bundle plate exchanger.
OPTIONAL: Local heat transfer element (optional). Finned tube plate exchanger (optional).
2 TIFCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TIFCC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 900 x 450 x 2000 mm. Weight: 100 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TIFCC.pdf
1.- Determination of the heat transfer
for a single tube.
2.- Determination of the heat transfer
for a bench of tubes.
3.- Determination of the average heat
transfer in a bench of tubes.
4.- Deduction of the relationship among
the numbers of Nusselt, Reynolds
and Prandtl.
5.- Effect produced by the external fins in
the heat transfer process.
6.- Determination of the heat transfer
for a bench of tubes with fins.
7.- Relationship between Nusselt´s an
Reynolds´s numbers using the
element TDC.
8.- Determination of local variation in
the transmission coefficient of
convective heat.
9.- Control System: Calibration of the
temperature sensors.
10.- Calibration of the differential
pressure sensor.
11.- Control System: Determination of
the adjustment parameters of a PIDPWM controller.
Other possible practices:
12.- Determination of the airflow.
13.- Dynamic Simulation of the Control
Systems.
14.- Operation and calibration of the
process equipment and control
elements.
15- 33. Practices with PLC.
TCMC. Computer Controlled Thermal Conductivity of Building and Insulating Materials Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TCMC. Thermal Conductivity of Building and Insulating Materials Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TCMC. Unit:
Unit for determination of thermal conductivity of building and other insulating materials. Panels an maiun metallic elements
in stainless steel.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Measurement of thermal
conductivity for materials with thermal resistance in the range 0.1 to 1.4 m2 K/W at mean
temperatures up to 50o C. Suitable for sheet, fibrous, granular and cellular materials. Suitable for soft, rigid, and semi-rigid
materials up to 5kg sample Weight. Suitable for homogeneous and non-homogeneous materials.
Specimens size: 300x300mm and up to 75mm of thicknesses. Thermal performance of single layer and composite
materials of various thicknesses up to 75mm. Insulated enclosure. Electric heater. Height adjustable 500W hot plate,
controlled. Water- cooled cold plate. Loading/lifting handwheel and screw.Optical switch under the cold plate senses the
compression of loading springs to ensure that a consistent pressure is applied to the specimen. Heat flow sensor, flitted to
cold plate. Temperature sensors. A set of specimens, 8 pieces.
2 TCMC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCMC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 950 x 700 x 500 mm. Weight: 60 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TCMC.pdf
Page 53
1.-
Determination of the thermal
conductivity of different materials.
2.-
Determination of the thermal
resistance.
3.-
Thermal conductivity of several
specimens connected in series.
4.-
Industrial research capability.
Other possible practices:
5.-
Sensors calibration.
6-24.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
1
9.9- Heat Transfer (General)
TRTC. Computer Controlled Thermal Radiation Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
4
3
Data
Control
Acquisition
Interface Box
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Unit: TRTC. Thermal Radiation Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TRTC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
This unit consist on a metal plate with a resistance at one side and a lamp in another side. Lengthwise of the metal plate you
can place the elements supplied with this unit. 7 Temperature sensors.
This unit is provided with elements for light experiments and radiation experiments:
Light elements: Lux meter. It has an output to the interface and you can read the value from PC by serial port.
Photodetector. 5 Different grey natural density filters. Filters porthole.
Radiation elements: Radiometer. Planes Surfaces (each one contains a temperature sensor): Polished Aluminium.
Anodized Aluminium. Brass. 2 Black Body.
Variable Slit or Aperture, that allows to regulate the area of the radiation.
Wattmeter
2 TRTC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TRTC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1400x820x900 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-
Inverse of the distant square law for
the radiation.
2.-
Stefan-Bolzman´s law.
3.-
Emission power I.
4.-
Emission power II.
5.-
Kirchhorff´s law.
6.-
Area factors.
7.-
Inverse of the distant square law for
the light.
8.-
A´lambert cosine´s law.
9.-
A´lambert absorption´s law.
Other possible practices:
10.- Sensors Calibration.
11-29 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TRTC.pdf
TMT. Temperature Measurement Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Bench-top unit to demonstrate the characteristics of the more common
temperature sensing an measuring devices.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in
the real unit.
Platinum resistance thermometer with digital temperature display.
Thermistor thermometer probe with digital temperature display.
A range of “K” type thermocouples (6 units), thermocouple type “T”and
thermocouple type “J”, which may be connected to either a digital
indicator displaying temperature or directly to a millivolt meter.
Selector switch for enabling up to eleven sensors or thermocouple
circuits to be connected to a digital temperature display.
Digital millivolt meter.
Vapour pressure thermometer, which works following the relation
between the temperature in a liquid and its vapour pressure.
Bi-metal dial thermometer.
Dry and wet bulb hygrometer.
Self-adhesive patch temperature indicators.
Alcohol in glass thermometer and storage case.
Water heater with power regulator and thermostatic protection, which
can provide temperatures up to boiling point.
High and ambient temperature air blower.
Vacuum flask which may be used for ice- water mixture, getting low
temperatures.
Connecting wires. Plugs. Protection devices.
Thermocouples parallel or series associations.
Cables and accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.): 800 x 600 x 700 mm. Weight: 50 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- D e t e r m i n i n g c o n c e p t s o f
temperature measurements and
scales.
2.- Thermometric properties and
characteristic behaviour of different
sensors.
3.- O p e r a t i o n , a p p l i c a t i o n a n d
assessment of the characteristics of
different temperature sensing and
indicating devices.
4.- Measuring precision, sensitivity and
measuring errors of the different
thermometers.
5.- I n t r o d u c t i o n t o c a l i b r a t i o n
techniques and physical principes of
each system.
6.- Calibration errors.
7.- Errors associated to a bad electrical
connection.
8.- Conduction and transmission errors.
9.- Dynamic response.
10.- Installation methods.
11.-Temperature scales: alcohol
thermometer.
12.- The bimetallic thermometer.
13.- The vapour pressure thermometer.
14.- The Peltier thermoelectric effect.
15.- The Seebeck thermoelectric effect.
16.- Intermediate metals Law.
17.- Intermediate temperatures Law.
18.- Direct measurement thermocouple.
19.- P a r a l l e l a s s o c i a t i o n o f
thermocouples.
20.- Series association of thermocouples.
21.- Platinum resistance thermometer.
22.- Thermistor.
23.- Wet and dry bulb thermometer.
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/heattransfergeneral/TMT.pdf
Page 49
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
9.9- Heat Transfer (General)
(continuation)
TCCC. Computer Controlled Heat Conduction Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TCCC. Heat Conduction Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
TCCC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and Main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Lineal Conduction Module: Input heat section. Electric heater with controller circuit. Temperature sensors distanced 10 mm.
Refrigeration section with a surface cooled by water and temperature sensors distanced 10mm.
Central section: With brass of 25 mm of diameter. With brass of 10 mm of diameter. With stainless steel of 25 mm of
diameter. Temperature sensors distanced 10 mm.
Radial Conduction Module: brass disk of 110 mm of diameter and 3 mm of thickness, with incorporated heater and
peripheral cooling tube, with temperature sensors distanced 10 mm.
Digital wattmeter of 0 to 120 W.13 Temperature sensors.
2 TCCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCCC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 300 x 300 x 175 mm. Weight: 50 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- Calibration processes.
2.- Calibration of the temperature
sensors.
3.- Conduction in a simple bar.
4.- Determination of the thermal
conductivity "k".
5.- Conduction through a compound
bar.
6.- Determination of the thermal
conductivity, k, of the stainless steel.
7.- Determination of the thermal
contact resistance Rtc .
8.- Effect of the crossing sectional area.
9.- Radial conduction.
10.- Insulation effect.
11-29 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TCCC.pdf
TCLGC. Computer Controlled Thermal Conductivity of Liquids and Gases Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TCLGC. Thermal Conductivity of
Liquids and Gases Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1
TCLGC. Unit:
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
High resistance surface in anodized aluminium structure. Aluminum body with brass jacket. Variable power resistance
computer controlled. Valves. 5 Temperature Sensors. Syringe. Sample inlet and outlet valves.
2
TCLGC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from thekeyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TCLGC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 300 x 400 x 500 mm. Weight: 60 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- Control system: Calibration of the
temperature sensors.
2.- Unit Calibration.
3.- Obtaining of the curve of Thermal
Conductivity of the air.
4.- Thermal Conductivity in vacuum.
5.- Water Thermal Conductivity
determination.
6.- Thermal Conductivity determination
of a mineral oil.
Other possible practices:
7.- Dry air thermal conductivity under
atmospheric pressure.
8-26 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransfergeneral/TCLGC.pdf
Page 51
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1
9.10- Heat Transfer (Special)
(continuation)
TFEC. Computer Controlled Flow Boiling Demonstration Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
Unit: TFEC. Flow Boiling
Demonstration Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TFEC. Unit:
Unit demonstrating what is happening inside the vapour generating tubes of practical plants. It is possible, in this unit, to
observe and see all the processes and types of flow involved during an evaporation process from sub-cooled liquid to
superheated vapour.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Heater exchanger: glass, contra-flow concentric tube type, with refrigerant flowing in the generating core tube and hot water
in the annulus. Centrifugal pump to circulate hot water. Water heating vessel with 500 W heater. Vacuum pump to extract air
from the system. Condensing chamber: glass vessel with brass end plates, with pressure sensors, water cooled condensing
coil and valves. Pressure sensors. Temperature sensors. Flow sensor. Safety valve and thermal protection.
2 TFEC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TFEC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 850 x 550 x 1850 mm. Weight: 60 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heattransferspecial/TFEC.pdf
1.-Demonstration of a heating process
accompanied by vapour formation
within a tube, including:
- Circulation promoted by natural
convection.
- Nucleation in sub-cooled and
saturated liquid.
- Convective heat transfer to subcooled liquid.
- Slugging.
- Droplet entrainment.
- Annular flow.
- Complete dry out to superheated
vapour.
2.-Demonstration of effect of air in
condensers.
3.-Demonstration of two phase flow with
increasing vapour content.
4.-Effect of flow rate on the evaporation
process.
5.-Effect of temperature on the
evaporation process.
6.-Effect of pressure on the evaporation
process.
Other possible practices:
7.-Sensors calibration.
8-26.-Practices with PLC.
TRLC. Computer Controlled Recycle Loops Unit
Pressure
regulator
Water supply
Always included
in the supply:
Electrical heater
To drain
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
Additional volume
Pump
Temperature sensor
Flow
sensor
Flow
sensor
Flow
sensor
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
Temperature
sensor
Temperature sensor
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: TRLC. Recycle Loops Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TRLC. Unit:
This unit consists of a through pipe conveying water from a cold water supply to a suitable drain with a
loop of pipework connected between the supply and drain connections. The recycle loop
incorporates a pump and an electrical heater (approx. 2 kW ) to raise the water temperature in the
loop. Over-temperature protection of electrical heater. A reservoir with self-sealing fittings allows the
volume of the loop to be changed. Temperatures at the entry to the system, at the exit from the system
and inside the recycle loop are measured using temperature sensors. Flow rates are measured using
flow sensors. Flow in the loop can be varied from 0 to 4 litres/min. The through flow of water can be
varied from 0 to 2 litres/min. A pressure regulator at the inlet to the unit minimises the effect of
fluctuations in the cold water supply pressure.
2 TRLC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process.
Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’
values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external
interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit,
electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TRLC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the
graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1000 x600 x 500 mm. Weight: 40 Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
thermodynamicsthermotechnics/heattransferspecial/TRLC.pdf
Page 55
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To understand the meaning of recycle.
Steady state mass balances: (2)
2.- Demonstrating that whatever the recycle rate, the inlet flow
rate always equals the outlet flow rate.
Unsteady state heat balances: (3-6)
3.- Determining the response when the electrical heater is
switched on at different through flow rates.
4.- Determining the effect of a step change in the input flow.
5.- Determining the response when the electrical heater is
switched off at different through flow rates.
6.- Determining the effect of recycle with no through flow.
Steady state heat balances: (7-8)
7.- With the electrical heater switched on and at fixed input water
flow rate the outlet temperature in independent of the recycle
rate.
8.- With the electrical heater switched on the temperature rise
between inlet and outlet can be used to determine the
combined heat input of the heater and pump at different
input water flow rates.
9.- Use of the steady flow energy equation for the overall system.
10.- Use of the steady flow energy equation for the mixing
process.
11.- Effects on response rates to parameter changes in recycle
flow.
12.- Effects on response rates to parameter changes in through
flow.
13.- Effects on response rates to parameter changes in loop
volume.
14.- Effects on response rates to parameter changes in heater
power.
15.- Observation of the patterns of boiling at the surface of the
water.
16.- To study the concept of a saturation line.
17.- The characteristic behaviour of two phase fluid.
18.- Comparison of test results with simulations using analytical
methods or using finite difference simulations.
19.- Sensors calibration.
20-38.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0951/PLC
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TTLFC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FLUIDISATION AND
FLUID BED HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
TCEC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR BOILING HEAT
TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
1
1
3
PLC-PI
TCLFC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FREE AND FORCED
CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER UNIT
1
1
4
PLC-PI
TIFCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR CROSS FLOW HEAT
EXCHANGER
1
1
5
PLC-PI
TCCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HEAT CONDUCTION
UNIT
1
1
6
PLC-PI
TFEC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FLOW BOILING
DEMONSTRATION UNIT
1
1
7
0951PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
8
0951PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
9
0951IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
10
0951CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
11
0951TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
12
0951MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0951/PLC
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
HEAT EXCHANGE MODULE (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0953/10S
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TICC
TIUS
TICC/CIB
DAB
TICC/CCSOF
TITC
TIPL
TIVE
TIVS
TIFT
TITCA
TIPLA
TICF
DESCRIPTION
HEAT EXCHANGERS TRAINING SYSTEMS, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED, FORMED BY:
SERVICE UNIT FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS TRAINING
SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR HEAT EXCHANGER
TRAINING SYSTEM
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR HEAT EXCHANGER
TRAINING SYSTEM
CONCENTRIC TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
JACKETED VESSEL HEAT EXCHANGER
COIL VESSEL HEAT EXCHANGER
TURBULENT FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER
EXTENDED TUBULAR HEAT EXCHANGER
EXTENDED RECONFIGURABLE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
CROSS FLOW HEAT EXCHANGER
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
TICC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR HEAT
EXCHANGERS TRAINING SYSTEM (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS) FOR THE HEAT
EXCHANGERS: CONCRENTIC TUBE, PLATE,
JACKETED VESSEL, COIL VESSEL AND TURBULENT
FLOW.
10
3
TICC/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR
HEAT EXCHANGERS TRAINING SYSTEMS
10
4
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
5
0953PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0953PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0953IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0953CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0953TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0953MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0953/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.7- Heat Exchange
TICC. Computer Controlled Heat Exchangers Training System:
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
Heat Exchangers available to be used with
the Base Service Unit:
4.2
4.1
( )
3
Computer Control
Data
Acquisition Software for each
Heat Exchanger
Board
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
TIPL. Plate Heat Exchanger ( )
4.3
TICT. Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger ( )
TITC. Concentric Tube
Heat Exchanger ( )
4.4
TIVE. Jacketed Vessel Heat Exchanger ( )
4.5
TIVS. Coil Vessel Heat Exchanger ( )
4.6
TIFT. Turbulent Flow Heat Exchanger ( )
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Common items for Heat Exchangers type”TI”:
1 TIUS. Base Service Unit:
This unit is common for Heat Exchangers type “TI” and can work with one or several exchangers.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Stainless steel tank equipped with:
Electric resistance. Temperature sensor to measure the water temperature. Level switch to control the water level of the
tank. Stainless steel cover to avoid the contact with the hot water, in this cover exists an hole to allows us to visualize the
water level and even to stuff the tank. Draining water valve.
Centrifugal pump with velocity adapter.
2 Flow sensors, one to control hot water and the other for cold water.
2 Control valves. 4 Ball valves that, depending on how do we manipulate them, they give us parallel or crosscurrent flux in
the exchanger.
Dimensions (approx.) =1180 x700 x500 mm. Weight : 50Kg.
2 TICC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process.
Realtime curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
Dimensions (approx.) =490 x330 x310 mm. Weight: 10Kg.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 Heat Exchangers available to be used with the Base Service Unit
4.1 TITC. Concentric Tube Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by two concentric copper tubes with hot water circulating through the interior tube and cold water circulating in the
ring space.
Exchange length L = 2 x 0.5 = 1 m.
Internal tube: Internal diameter: Dint = 16•10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext = 18 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3m. Heat transfer
internal area: Ah = 0.0503 m2. Heat transfer external area: Ac= 0.0565m2.
External tube: Internal diameter: Dint = 26 • 10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext = 28 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3 m.
6 Temperature sensors. 4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Concentric Tube Heat
Exchanger (TITC):
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x320mm. Weight: 20Kg.
4.2 TIPL. Plate Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by corrugated stainless steel plates. 4 ports or connections of input and output of hot and cold water. 4 Temperature
sensors. 4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Plate Heat Exchanger
(TIPL). (#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x320 mm. Weight: 20Kg.
Continue...
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 45
Practices to be done with the
Concentric Tube Heat Exchanger
(TITC):
1.-
Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
2.-
Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
3.-
Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
4.-
Global energy balance in the
exchanger and the study of losses.
5.-
Exchanger effectiveness
determination. NTU Method.
6.-
Study of the heat transfer under of
countercurrent and parallel flown
conditions.
7.-
Flow influence in the heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
8-26 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Plate
Heat Exchanger (TIPL):
27.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
28.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
29.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
30.- Global energy balance in the
exchanger and the study of losses.
31.- E x c h a n g e r e f f e c t i v e n e s s
determination. NTU Method.
32.- Study of the heat transfer under of
countercurrent and parallel flow
conditions.
33.- Flow influence in the heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
34-52 .- Practices with PLC.
Continue...
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
4
TIUS. Base Service Unit
9.7- Heat Exchange
(continuation)
TICC. Computer Controlled Heat Exchangers Training System:(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY (continuation)
4 Heat Exchangers available to be used with the Base Service Unit (continuation):
4.3 TICT.Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by tubes of stainless steel with hot water circulating for the interior.
4 segmented baffles located transversal in the shell.
Exchange length of the shell and each tube: L = 0.5m.
Interior tube:
Internal diameter: Dint = 8 • 10-3 m. External diameter: Dext= 10 • 10-3 m. Thickness = 10-3 m. Internal heat transfer
area: Ah = 0.0126 m2. External heat transfer area for each tube: Ac = 0.0157m2
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
Shell:
Internal diameter: Dint,c = 0.148 m. External diameter: Dext,c = 0.160 m. Thickness = 6 • 10-3 m.
7 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Shell & Tube Heat
Exchanger (TICT).(#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x500mm. Weight: 30Kg.
4.4 TIVE. Jacketed Vessel Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Constituted of a vessel.
An overflow or a pipe that allows the exit of the water in the vessel through its superior part to maintain a constant flow during
the process withcontinuous supply.
A jacket that surrounds the vessel through where hot water flows.
An electric stirrer with a stirring rod of propeller shape and a turn range between 50 and 2000 rpm.
A calibrated ruler placed on the surface of the vessel that indicates the volume of hot water contained in the vessel.
5 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Jacketed Vessel Heat
Exchanger (TIVE). (#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x700mm. Weight: 35Kg.
4.5 TIVS. Coil Vessel Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by a pvc-glass vessel. Dint = 0.188 m. Dext = 0.200 m.
An overflow or pvc-glass tube lets the output of water from the vessel in the upper part in order to maintain the flow constant
for continue supply process.
A copper coil where the water circulates: Dint = 4.35 mm. Dext = 6.35 mm. Total longitude of the tube that forms the coil: 5
m. Total diameter of coil: 0.1m.
An electronic stirring using a stirring rod forming a propeller and with a turn range between 50 and 2000 rpm.
A graduated ruler situated on the surface of the vessel indicates the flow of water into the vessel.
5 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchanger with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Coil Vessel Heat
Exchanger (TIVS).(#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x700mm. Weight: 30Kg.
4.6 TIFT. Turbulent Flow Heat Exchanger:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Formed by two copper concentric tubes with hot water circulating through the internal tube and cold water circulating
through the annular space.
Exchange length: L = 3 x 0.5 = 1.5 m.
Internal tube:
Internal diameter: Dint = 8 • 10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext = 10 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3 m. Internal heat transfer
area: Ah = 0.0377 m2. External heat transfer area: Ac = 0.0471 m2 .
External tube:
Internal diameter: Dint,c 13 • 10 -3 m. External diameter: Dext,c 15 • 10 -3 m. Thickness = 10 -3 m.
12 Temperature sensors.
4 Flexible tubes to connect the exchange with the Base Service Unit.
Computer Control Software: Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Turbulent Flow Heat
Exchanger (TIFT).(#)
This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 1180 x700 x350 mm. Weight:20 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
heatexchange/TICC.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 46
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES(continuation)
Practices to be done with the Shell &
Tube Heat Exchanger (TICT):
53.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
54.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
55.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
56.- Global energy balance in the
exchanger and the study of
losses.
57.- E x c h a n g e r e f f e c t i v e n e s s
determination. NTU Method.
58.- Study of the heat transfer under of
countercurrent and parallel flow
conditions.
59.- Flow influence in the heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
60-78 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the
Jacketed Vessel Heat Exchanger
(TIVE):
79.- Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
80.- Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
81.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor.
82.- Global balance of energy in the
exchanger and losses study.
83.- Determination of the exchanger
effectiveness. Method NTU.
84.- Influence of the flow in the heat
transfer . Calculation of the
number of Reynolds.
85.- Influence of the stirring of the vessel
on the heat transfer when
operating by lots.
86.- Influence of the vessel's water
volume on the heat transfer when
operating by lots.
87-105 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the Coil
Vessel Heat Exchanger (TIVS):
106.- Control System: Temperature
sensors calibration.
107.- Control System: Flow sensors
calibration.
108.- Study of the hysteresis of the flow
sensor
.
109.- Global balance of energy in the
exchanger and the study of losses.
110.-Determination of the exchanger
effectiveness. NTU Method.
111.- Influence of the flow in the heating
transfer. Calculation of Reynolds
number.
112.-Influence of the stirring vessel in the
heat transfer with operation in
lots.
113.- Influence of the water volume in
the vessel about the heat transfer
with operation lots.
114-132 .- Practices with PLC.
Practices to be done with the
Turbulent Flow Heat Exchanger
(TIFT):
133.-Control system: Temperature
sensors calibration.
134.-Control system: Flow sensors
calibration.
135.-Study of the hysteresis in the flow
sensors.
136.-Global energy balance in the
exchangers and loss study.
137.-Determination of the exchanger
effectiveness. NTU Method.
138.-Study of the heat transfer in
crosscurrent and parallel flow
conditions.
139.-Flow influence in heat transfer.
Reynolds number calculation.
140.-Obtaining of the correlation that
relates Nusselt number with
Reynolds number and Prandtl
number.
141.-Obtaining of the heat transfer
coefficients by convection.
142-160 .- Practices with PLC.
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0953/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TICC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
TRAINING SYSTEMS
1
1
2
0953PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0953PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0953IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0952CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0953TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0953MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
NOZZLES MODULE
Ref: 0970
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TFTC
TFTC.Unit
TFTC/CIB
DAB
TFTC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED NOZZLE PERFORMANCE TEST
UNIT, FORMED BY:
NOZZLE PERFORMANCE TEST UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR NOZZLE
PERFORMANCE TEST UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR NOZZLE PERFORMANCE
TEST UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
2
TFTC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR NOZZLE
PERFORMANCE TEST UNIT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
TPT
NOZZLE PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION UNIT
1
4
TPT/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR NOZZLE
PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
5
0970PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0970PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0970IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0970CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0970TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0970MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0970
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.11- Nozzles & Steam
TFTC. Computer Controlled Nozzle Performance Test Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TFTC. Nozzle Performance Test Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TFTC. Unit:
This unit has been specially designed to allow students to investigate the performance of a nozzle,as a kinetic energy producer
and as a thrust producer.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Chamber
in stainless steel, diameter: 200 mm. approx. and height: 400 mm. approx. End cover secured by bolts and sealed by O ring.
Nozzles kit of 2 mm. of nominal
throat; One them convergent, 4 convergent-divergent with 1.2, 1.4, 1.6 and 2 ratio,
respectively. Divergence 10o (included). 2 Pressure sensors from 0-8 bar, to measure chamber inlet and outlet pressures. 1
Pressure sensor in the chamber. 2 Temperature sensors to measure chamber inlet and outlet temperatures.1 Temperature
sensors in the chamber. Flow sensor (air volume and pressure at the outlet of the chamber).Force sensor. Deviation valves to
direct air to the nozzle or to the chamber. Needle valve to precise adjustment. Back valve to control chamber pressure. Safety
valve to control the inlet pressure, air regulator and filter where the laboratory . Compressor will be connected. Operates at
ambient temperature-stabilises immediately.
2 TFTC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TFTC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1000x700x600 mm. Weight: 60 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
1.- Visual demonstration of the
phenomenon of "choking".
2.- Determination of jet reaction and
specific thrust at a variety of inlet and
back pressure.
3.- Determination of inlet pressure effect
on mass flow rate, for a given
counter-pressure.
4.- Comparison of actual mass flow rate
with the theoretical value.
5.- Determination of the counter
pressure effect on mass flow rate.
6.- Calculation of nozzle efficiencies.
7.- Determination of the jet velocity and
the nozzle efficiency.
8.- Determination of the jet reaction and
the specific pushing.
9.- Simple and classical method used to
determine jet velocity.
10.- Measurement of mass flow rate and
coefficient of discharge.
Other possible practices:
11.- Sensors calibration.
12-30 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
nozzlessteam/TFTC.pdf
TPT. Nozzle Pressure Distribution Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Nozzles: convergent type (conical), with 6 pressure tappings; convergentdivergent type, with 5 pressure tappings, for a design pressure ratio of
0.25; convergent- divergent, with 8 pressure tappings, for a design
pressure ratio of 0.1.
Nozzles can be changed quickly and easily.
2 Pressure meters (manometers), 100 mm. diameter, to measure air inlet
and outlet pressures (range: 0 to 10 bar). 8 Pressure meters (manometers),
60 mm. diameter, to determine the pressure at the nozzle tappings (range: 1 to 8 bar).
Variable area type flow meter to indicate air flow at standard conditions (p=
1.2Kg/m-3). (Correction factors for other pressures and temperatures are
provided). Range 0 to 9 g s-1.
2 Glass temperature meters, to indicate air temperature before and after
nozzle(range: 0 to 50ºC).
Valves to give a fine control of air inlet pressure and outlet pressure. Air filter
and pressure regulator to provide constant pressure, clean and water free
air to the unit.
It works at ambient temperature- stabilises immediately.
Gives students an opportunity to calibrate equipment.
Cables and accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 590 x 890 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Visual demonstration of the
phenomenon of choking.
2.- Investigation of the relationship
between inlet pressure and the mass
flow rate.
3.- Demonstration of under expansion
and over expansion with recompression.
4.- Investigation of the relationship
between outlet pressure and mass
flow rate for a convergent nozzle.
5.- Investigation of the relationship
between outlet pressure and mass
flow rate for a convergent -divergent
nozzle.
6.- Investigation of the pressure
distribution in convergent and
convergent-divergent nozzles when
operating with several overall
pressure ratios.
7.- Calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/nozzlessteam/TPT.pdf
TGV. Steam Generator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and stainless steel metallic elements. Heat
resistant polycarbonate protection screens. Stainless steel water tank with
a water inlet, a water outlet and two steam outlets. Tank filling automatic
system. Temperature Sensor. Safety Level Switch. Safety Pressure Switch.
Electric Resistance: 3000 W.
Electronic Console, including: Main switch on the back part of the
console (magnetothermic). Temperature Controller. Resistance on/off
indicator. Water critical level indicator. Connectors “micro” for the
temperature sensor, the level switch and the pressure switch. Unit on/off
main switch.
Diagram in the front panel.
Dimensions of generator(approx.): 680 x 430 x 750 mm. Weight: 50Kg
Dimensions of console (approx.): 300 x 190 x 120 mm. Weight: 3Kg.
Other available version:
- TGV-6kW. Steam Generator, three-phase, 6 KW.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/nozzlessteam/TGV-TGV-6KW.pdf
Page 58
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0970/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TFTC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR NOZZLE PERFORMANCE
TEST UNIT
1
1
2
0970PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0970PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0970IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0970CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0970TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0970MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
COMBUSTION MODULE
Ref: 0980
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TVCC
TVCC.Unit
TVCC/CIB
DAB
TVPLC.Unit
TVCC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED COMBUSTION LABORATORY
UNIT, FORMED BY:
COMBUSTION LABORATORY UNIT
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMBUSTION
LABORATORY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
FLAME PROPAGATION AND STABILITY UNIT
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMBUSTION
LABORATORY UNIT
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
TVCC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
COMBUSTION LABORATORY UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
TVPLC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FLAME PROPAGATION AND
STABILITY UNIT, FORMED BY:
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR FLAME PROPAGATION
AND STABILITY UNIT
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR FLAME PROPAGATION
AND STABILITY UNIT
1
TVPLC/CIB
DAB
TVPLC/CCSOF
1
1
1
4
TVPLC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FLAME
PROPAGATION AND STABILITY UNIT (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
5
0980PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0980PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0980IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0980CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0980TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
10
0980MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
11
0980TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
12
0980MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0980
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
9.12- Combustion
TVCC. Computer Controlled Combustion Laboratory Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Unit: TVCC. Combustion Laboratory Unit
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TVCC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Combustion chamber: water cooled chamber, dimensions: 460 dia. x 910 mm approx., either an oil or gas burner can be
fired; we can observe the flame through windows. Burner for oil or gas. Fan and regulator. Water, gas and fuel control. Flow
sensors for cooling water, air and fuel. Gas flow sensor. Gas analysation. Smoke Number can be determined for the oil
burner with the smoke tester. Temperature sensors.
2 TVCC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TVCC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200x1000x1700 mm. Weight: 200 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
combustion/TVCC.pdf
1.- To study burner operation and
combustion process.
2.- Familiarisation of the adjustment
and operation of a commercial oil or
gas burner.
3.- Effect of air/fuel ratio on combustion
efficiency as measured by flue gas
constituents and temperature.
4.- Effect of air/fuel ratio on energy
balance.
5.- Effect of air/fuel ratio on heat
transfer.
6.- Effect of flame radiation on heat
transfer and observed temperature.
7.- Comparison of flue gas analysis with
theoretical predictions.
8.- Comparative performance of
different fuels or fuel additives.
9.- Assessment of a burner, including:
Flame stability.
Flame shape.
Flame radiation.
Firing rate.
Turndown range.
Smoke emission.
10.- Extraction of gas samples from a
range of locations within the
combustion chamber.
11.- Comparison of oil and gas burners.
Other possible practices:
12.- Sensors calibration.
13-31 .- Practices with PLC.
TVPLC. Computer Controlled Flame Propagation and Stability Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1
Unit: TVPLC. Flame Propagation and Stability Unit
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
TVPLC. Unit:
Items supplied as standard
This unit has been designed to allow students to investigate the behaviour characteristics of flames in a quantitative and
qualitative manner. Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the
real unit. Air and gas control valves.
Flame stability: air flow sensor, gas flow sensor, 4 interchangeable burner tubes, 2 brass conical cups to fit 2 burner tubes
(Stabilizer cups), heat resistant glass tube and brass adaptor, igniter.
Flame Speed: flame speed tube: 25 mm. diameter x 5 m. long; igniter, 2 flame speed adaptors, each complete with flame
traps, adaptor fitted with an igniter plug.
Unit protected by circuit breaker and residual current circuit breaker. Gas safety valve. Single stage centrifugal air blower. All
components connected to common earth/ground points.
2 TVPLC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TVPLC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1100x550x550 mm. Weight:30 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
1.-
Demonstration of the process of
flame lift off.
2.- Demonstration of the process of
flame light back.
3.- It enables the student to investigate
and study methods of improving
flame stability limits.
4.- It provides data for the construction
of flames stability diagrams.
5.- To investigate the relationship of
flame speed and air/fuel ratio for a
variety of slow burning gaseous
fuels.
6.- To investigate the vertical and
horizontal flame movement.
7.- To study the effect of changing crosssection on flame speed.
8.- Effect of directional change on flame
speed.
9.- To study methods of arresting or
quenching moving flames in the
flame speed tube.
10.- Sensors calibration.
11-29 .- Practices with PLC.
combustion/TVPLC.pdf
Page 59
www.edibon.com
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0980/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TVCC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMBUSTION
LABORATORY UNIT
1
1
2
PLC-PI
TVPLC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FLAME PROPAGATION
AND STABILITY UNIT
1
1
3
0980PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0980PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
0980IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
0980CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0980TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0980MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
TURBINES - "THERMAL" MODULE
Ref: 0981
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TTVC
TTVC.Unit
TTVC/CIB
TTVC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
STEAM TURBINE, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
STEAM TURBINE
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR STEAM TURBINE
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR STEAM TURBINE
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
TTVC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR STEAM
TURBINE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
TGV/6KWA
STEAM GENERATOR (6KW) (FOR HIGH PRESSURES
AND HIGH TEMPERATURES)
1
4
HTVC
SOLAR/HEAT SOURCE VAPOUR TURBINE, COMPUTER
CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
SOLAR/HEAT SOURCE VAPOUR TURBINE
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR SOLAR/HEAT SOURCE
VAPOUR TURBINE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT FOR SOLAR/HEAT SOURCE VAPOUR
TURBINE
1
HTVC.Unit
HTVC/CIB
DAB
HTVC/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
5
HTVC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SOLAR
/ HEAT SOURCE VAPOUR TURBINE (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
6
HTVC/KIT
SOLAR PANNELS AND INSTALLATION KIT
1
7
0981PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
8
0981PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
9
0981IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
10
0981CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
11
0981TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
12
0981MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
13
0981TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
0981MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0981
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
8.6- Hydraulic Machines (Turbines)
(continuation)
TFAC. Computer Controlled Axial Flow Turbine
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3
2
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TFAC. Axial Flow Turbine
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TFAC. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Nozzle: throat inlet diameter: 2mm, throat outlet diameter: 2mm, discharge angle: 20º and 30º.
Turbine Rotor: external diameter: 53mm, internal diameter: 45mm, number of blades: 40, inlet angle of the blades: 40º,
outlet angle of the blades: 40º, used material: brass.
Brake: pulley diameter: 60mm., effective radio: 50mm.
4 Pressure Sensors: 0 to 100 psi (0 to 6.0 bar). Torque Sensor: 0-20 N. Flow Sensor: 0 to 80 l./min. Magnetic Speed Sensor:
0 to 20000 r.p.m. Water Pump: maximum pressure: 6 bar, maximum water flow: 100l./min. Electrical power: 220V.
2 TFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TFAC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 800x900x800 mm. Weight: 100 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/fluidmechanicsaerodynamics/
hydraulicmachinesturbines/TFAC.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Pressure Sensors Calibration.
Flow Sensor Calibration.
Torque Sensor Calibration.
Determination of the nozzle
discharge coefficient.
5.- Determination of operating
characteristics of the Axial Turbine at
different speed values (20ºnozzle).
6.- Determination of operating
characteristics of the Axial Turbine at
different speed values (30ºnozzle).
7.- Determination of the Axial Turbine
characteristic curves (20º nozzle).
8.- Determination of the Axial Turbine
characteristic curves (30º nozzle).
9.- Torque, efficiency and power curves
at a constant value (20º nozzle).
10.- Torque, efficiency and power curves
at a constant value (30º nozzle).
11.- Determination of curves in relation
to the turning speed (20º nozzle).
12.- Determination of curves in relation
to the turning speed (30º nozzle).
13.- Determination of curves in relation
to the flow (20º nozzle).
14.- Determination of curves in relation
to the flow (30º nozzle).
15.- Adimensionalization.
16-34 .- Practices with PLC.
TTVC. Computer Controlled Steam Turbine
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TTVC. Steam Turbine
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TTVC. Unit:
Bench top unit. Unit incorporating a single stage impulse steam turbine with water cooled friction brake, condenser,
condensate measurement and all instruments and safety devices. Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main
metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Turbine:
Single stage, axial flow impulse turbine. Convergent -divergent nozzle. Rotor has blades with 45o inlet and discharge
angles. Max. speed 40000 rpm.
Brake: Water cooled brake drum , with brake band tensioned by adjusted pulley. Condenser: glass chamber with water
cooling coil. Condensate measurement.
5 temperature sensors. Turbine rotational speed controlled. Speed and torque sensors. Brake load indication for brake
frictional force. Flow sensor. Pressure sensors. Turbine overspeed protection. Condenser overpressure switch.
Condenser relief valve.
2 TTVC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TTVC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 700x450x725 mm. Weight: 50 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
turbines/TTVC.pdf
Page 28
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1 .- Determination of friction losses at
various exhaust pressures.
2 .- Determination of torque, power
and specific steam consumption
when operating at constant inlet
pressure but with varying exhaust
pressure.
3.- Determination of torque, power
and specific steam consumption
when operating
at constant
exhaust pressure but with varying
inlet pressure.
4 .- Determination of power to heat
ratio when used as a back pressure
turbine.
5 .- Determination of thermal efficiency.
6 .- Determination of Isentropic
efficiency.
7.- Study of the specific steam
consumption of the turbine.
8 .- Sensors calibration.
9-27 .- Practices with PLC.
8.6- Hydraulic Machines (Turbines)
(continuation)
HTVC. Computer Controlled Solar/Heat Source Vapour Turbine
8.- Fluid Mechanics & Aerodynamics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
Control
Interface Box
5 Cables and Accessories
3
4
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
6 Manuals
1
Unit: HTVC. Solar/Heat Source Vapour Turbine
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1
Items supplied as standard
HTVC. Unit:
This unit has been designed to provide an easily understood vapour power plant and to demonstrate, on a lab scale, the
ability to produce shaft power from Solar Radiation.
Compact and bench-top unit ,using R141b refrigerant.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Vapour generator: copper generating coil in water filled tank with thermostatically controlled heater.
Single stage impulse turbine, power output 35W at 20000 rev. min-1 approx.
Condenser: water cooled coil housed in a chamber.
Feed pump (single acting plunger pump).
Accumulator.
Circulating pump to circulate water though vapour generator tank and solar panels.
Up to 12 Temperature sensors. 2 Pressure sensors. Flow sensors. Torque and speed measurement.
High pressure cut-out.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY: (not included in the standard supply)
Solar Panels and Installation Kit: Two solar panels. Water flow sensor. Temperature sensors. Expansion tank. Pipe, fittings,
etc.
2 HTVC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 HTVC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = Unit: 1000 x 500 x 925 mm. Weight: 80 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
turbines/HTVC.pdf
TFC. Computer Controlled Francis Turbine
Page 30
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1. -Production of torque/speed and
power/speed curves for the turbine.
2.- E a s y a n d c l e a r l y o b s e r v e d
demonstration of a classic Rankine
cycle.
3. -Determination of thermal efficiency at
a range of turbine inlet and exhaust
pressures.
4. -Use of property charts or tables and
the application of the First Law of
Thermodynamics to produce energy
balances.
5. -Estimation of total frictional losses in
turbines.
6. -Comparison of performance with the
Rankine Cycle, (including the
external isentropic efficiency of
turbines).
Other possible practices:
7. -Sensors Calibration.
Possible Practices with OPTIONAL Solar
Panels:
8. -Measurement of the solar energy
collection at a range of mean water
temperatures.
9. -Demonstration of the production of
shaft work from solar radiation.
10-28.- Practices with PLC.
9.11- Nozzles & Steam
TFTC. Computer Controlled Nozzle Performance Test Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
3
4
Data
Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
1
Unit: TFTC. Nozzle Performance Test Unit
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TFTC. Unit:
This unit has been specially designed to allow students to investigate the performance of a nozzle,as a kinetic energy producer
and as a thrust producer.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Chamber
in stainless steel, diameter: 200 mm. approx. and height: 400 mm. approx. End cover secured by bolts and sealed by O ring.
Nozzles kit of 2 mm. of nominal
throat; One them convergent, 4 convergent-divergent with 1.2, 1.4, 1.6 and 2 ratio,
respectively. Divergence 10o (included). 2 Pressure sensors from 0-8 bar, to measure chamber inlet and outlet pressures. 1
Pressure sensor in the chamber. 2 Temperature sensors to measure chamber inlet and outlet temperatures.1 Temperature
sensors in the chamber. Flow sensor (air volume and pressure at the outlet of the chamber).Force sensor. Deviation valves to
direct air to the nozzle or to the chamber. Needle valve to precise adjustment. Back valve to control chamber pressure. Safety
valve to control the inlet pressure, air regulator and filter where the laboratory . Compressor will be connected. Operates at
ambient temperature-stabilises immediately.
2 TFTC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 TFTC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 1000x700x600 mm. Weight: 60 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
9.- Thermodynamics & Thermotechnics
1
1.- Visual demonstration of the
phenomenon of "choking".
2.- Determination of jet reaction and
specific thrust at a variety of inlet and
back pressure.
3.- Determination of inlet pressure effect
on mass flow rate, for a given
counter-pressure.
4.- Comparison of actual mass flow rate
with the theoretical value.
5.- Determination of the counter
pressure effect on mass flow rate.
6.- Calculation of nozzle efficiencies.
7.- Determination of the jet velocity and
the nozzle efficiency.
8.- Determination of the jet reaction and
the specific pushing.
9.- Simple and classical method used to
determine jet velocity.
10.- Measurement of mass flow rate and
coefficient of discharge.
Other possible practices:
11.- Sensors calibration.
12-30 .- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/
nozzlessteam/TFTC.pdf
TPT. Nozzle Pressure Distribution Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Nozzles: convergent type (conical), with 6 pressure tappings; convergentdivergent type, with 5 pressure tappings, for a design pressure ratio of
0.25; convergent- divergent, with 8 pressure tappings, for a design
pressure ratio of 0.1.
Nozzles can be changed quickly and easily.
2 Pressure meters (manometers), 100 mm. diameter, to measure air inlet
and outlet pressures (range: 0 to 10 bar). 8 Pressure meters (manometers),
60 mm. diameter, to determine the pressure at the nozzle tappings (range: 1 to 8 bar).
Variable area type flow meter to indicate air flow at standard conditions (p=
1.2Kg/m-3). (Correction factors for other pressures and temperatures are
provided). Range 0 to 9 g s-1.
2 Glass temperature meters, to indicate air temperature before and after
nozzle(range: 0 to 50ºC).
Valves to give a fine control of air inlet pressure and outlet pressure. Air filter
and pressure regulator to provide constant pressure, clean and water free
air to the unit.
It works at ambient temperature- stabilises immediately.
Gives students an opportunity to calibrate equipment.
Cables and accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.): 1000 x 590 x 890 mm. Weight: 50Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Visual demonstration of the
phenomenon of choking.
2.- Investigation of the relationship
between inlet pressure and the mass
flow rate.
3.- Demonstration of under expansion
and over expansion with recompression.
4.- Investigation of the relationship
between outlet pressure and mass
flow rate for a convergent nozzle.
5.- Investigation of the relationship
between outlet pressure and mass
flow rate for a convergent -divergent
nozzle.
6.- Investigation of the pressure
distribution in convergent and
convergent-divergent nozzles when
operating with several overall
pressure ratios.
7.- Calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/nozzlessteam/TPT.pdf
TGV. Steam Generator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and stainless steel metallic elements. Heat
resistant polycarbonate protection screens. Stainless steel water tank with
a water inlet, a water outlet and two steam outlets. Tank filling automatic
system. Temperature Sensor. Safety Level Switch. Safety Pressure Switch.
Electric Resistance: 3000 W.
Electronic Console, including: Main switch on the back part of the
console (magnetothermic). Temperature Controller. Resistance on/off
indicator. Water critical level indicator. Connectors “micro” for the
temperature sensor, the level switch and the pressure switch. Unit on/off
main switch.
Diagram in the front panel.
Dimensions of generator(approx.): 680 x 430 x 750 mm. Weight: 50Kg
Dimensions of console (approx.): 300 x 190 x 120 mm. Weight: 3Kg.
Other available version:
- TGV-6kW. Steam Generator, three-phase, 6 KW.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/thermodynamicsthermotechnics/nozzlessteam/TGV-TGV-6KW.pdf
Page 58
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 0981/PLC
ITEM
1 / 1
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLC-PI
TTVC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR STEAM TURBINE
1
1
2
PLC-PI
HTVC/PLC-SOF
PLC MODULE
PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR SOLAR/HEAT SOURCE
VAPOUR TURBINE
1
1
3
0843PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0843PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
0843IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
0843CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0843TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0843MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several prog